Ece 2013

Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
(For the students admitted from the

Academic Year 2014-2015)
KALASALINGAM UNIVERSITY
(Kalasalingam Academy of Research and Education)
(Under Section 3 of the UGC Act 1956)
Anand Nagar, Krishnankoil-626190 Srivilliputhur (via);
Virudhunagar (Dt.), Tamil Nadu, INDIA
(www.klu.ac.in)
B.TECH. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Curriculum and Syllabus

Regulation 2013
Revised as per Regulations 2014
(For the students admitted from the
Academic Year 2014-2015)
VISION: -To become an internationally leading centre of higher learning and research in
the domain of Electronics and Communication Engineering
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
VISION OF THE UNIVERSITY
To be a Centre of Excellence of International repute in education and research
MISSION OF THE UNIVERSITY
To produce technically competent, socially committed technocrats and administrators

through quality education and research
VISION OF THE DEPARTMENT

To become an internationally leading centre of higher learning and research in the domain
of Electronics and Communication Engineering
MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT
To provide quality education in the domain of Electronics and Communication
Engineering through updated curriculum, effective teaching learning process , best of
breed laboratory facilities and collaborative ventures with the industries
To inculcate innovative skills, research aptitude, team-work, ethical practices among
students so as to meet expectations of the industry as well as society
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEO)
PEO1: Technical Proficiency:
Succeed in obtaining employment appropriate to their interests, education and will become
productive and valued engineers within their companies
PEO2: Professional Growth:
Continue to develop professionally through life-long learning, higher education, and other
creative pursuits in their areas of expertise or interest
PEO3: Management Skills:
Exercise leadership (management) qualities in a responsive, ethical, and innovative manner
Department of ECE
Curriculum and Syllabus-2013-14
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (PO)
POs describe what students are expected to know or be able to do by the time of graduation
from the programme. The Program Outcomes of UG in Electronics and Communication
Engineering are:
At the end of the programme, the students will be able to:

1) Apply knowledge of Mathematics, Science, Engineering fundamentals and
specialisation in Electronics and Communication Engineering to the conceptualisation
of Engineering models
2) Identify, formulate and solve complex problems in the domains of analog/digital
electronics, signal processing and communication engineering, reaching substantiated
conclusions using first principles of Mathematics and Engineering Sciences
3) Design/develop Microprocessor, Microcontroller based systems, Communication and
Networking systems, Algorithms for signal processing and VLSI circuit components to
meet desired specifications with realistic constraints such as manufacturability and
sustainability
4) Design and conduct experiments in analog/digital systems, signal processing and
communication and networking systems, analyse and interpret data, and synthesise
information to provide valid conclusions using simulation techniques and/or numerical
methods, graphics
5) Select and apply necessary engineering instruments, equipments, like Digital Storage
Oscilloscope, Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, DSP and FPGA kits, and modern
CAD tools, for Digital Signal Processing, Communication Engineering, Networking
and VLSI Engineering practices with an understanding of their limitations
6) Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, safety, legal
and cultural issues, and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional
engineering practice
7) Demonstrate the knowledge of contemporary issues in the field of Electronics and
Communication Engineering
8) Commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering practice
9) Work effectively as an individual, and also as a member or leader in multicultural and
multidisciplinary teams
10) Effectively communicate about their field of expertise on their activities, with their peer
and society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and
design documentation, make effective presentations
11) Manage projects by applying gained knowledge on Engineering and Management
principles
12) Adapt themselves completely to the demands of the Electronics and Communicationrelated Engineering by life-long learning
Department of ECE
Table 1-1 PEOs consistency with Mission of the Department
KEY COMPONENTS
FROM DEPARTMENT
MISSION
Quality Education
PEO1
PEO2
PEO3
Research
Teamwork, Ethical Practices
Innovative Skills
Communication Skills (Meet

Industrial and Social
expectations)
Table 1-2 Curriculum Contribution towards attainment of PEOs
Number of Credits
Curriculum
Content
(% of total credits)
PEOs
Mathematics and
Basic Sciences
25
14%
PEO1
Basic Engineering
17
10%
PEO1
Professional Cores
79
44%
PEO1, PEO2, PEO3
Major Electives
16
9%
PEO1, PEO2, PEO3
Project Work
10
6%
PEO1, PEO2, PEO3
Humanities
13
7%
PEO3
Interdisciplinary
(Minor, Free
Elective) Courses
17
10%
PEO1, PEO2, PEO3
Course Component
Department of ECE
2.
3.
4.
English for technical

communication I
MAT103 Mathematics I
PHY131 Physics I
CHY106 Chemistry
5.
MEC101 Engineering Drawing
6.
CIV101
7.
MEC181 Workshop
8.
CHY181 Chemistry Laboratory
1.
HSS101
Basic
engineering
II
16. PHY182 Physics Laboratory
III 4
Professional
4 Core
19. ECE201 Electron Devices
18. MAT202 Mathematics III
Department of ECE
Basic
engineering
Mathematics and
Basic Sciences
Basic
engineering
Basic
engineering
Mathematics and
Basic Science
Basic
engineering
Mathematics and
Basic Science
15. MEC103 Engineering Mechanics
21. ECE205 Electronic Circuits

Electromagnetic Waves and
22. ECE209
Transmission lines
20. ECE203 Network Analysis
3 Mathematics and
3 Basic sciences
Basic Electrical and

Electronics Engineering
Programming Language
Laboratory
Mathematics and
Basic Sciences
Humanities
14. CSE102 Programming Languages
17. CSE102
Attained
PEOs
Basic Civil and Mechanical

Engineering
13. CHY102 Environmental Sciences
3
Mathematics and
3
Basic Sciences
3
HSS102
12. EEE101
PEO1 PEO2 PEO3
2 Humanities
English for technical

communication II
10. MAT104 Mathematics II
11. PHY132 Physics II
9.
Course
Component
Credits
Semester
Subject
Code
Sl. No.
CORRELATION BETWEEN COURSE OUTCOMES AND PROGRAMME

OUTCOMES
Table 1-3 Curriculum Contents Mapping with PEOs
Data Structures and

Algorithms
Electron Devices and
24. ECE284
Circuits Laboratory
Data Structures and
25. CSE295
Algorithms Laboratory
Attained
PEOs
Course
Component
Credits
Semester
Subject
Code
Sl. No.
PEO1 PEO2 PEO3
Interdisciplinary
Course
Professional
Core
Interdisciplinary
Course
Mathematics and
Basic Science
Humanities
28. ECE206 Signals and Systems

4
Control System
29. ECE208
3
Engineering
30. ECE210 Digital Design using HDL IV 4
Professional
Linear Integrated
31. ECE211
4 Core
Electronics
Integrated Electronics
32. ECE283
2
Laboratory
HDL Programming
33. ECE285
Laboratory
34. ECEXXX Major Elective I
4 Major Elective
Interdisciplinary
35. ECEXXX Minor Elective I
3
Course
V
36. ECE381 Digital Signal Processing
4
Professional
Analog and Digital
37. ECE307
3 Core
Communication
Computer Organization and
38. ECE308
4
Architecture
Microprocessors and
39. ECE304
3
Microcontrollers
Professional
Digital Signal Processing V
40. ECE381
2 Core
Laboratory
Microprocessors and
41. ECE385 Microcontrollers
2
Laboratory
42. HSSXXX Humanities Elective II
3 Humanities
Professional
43. ECE309 VLSI Design
4
Core
VI
Interdisciplinary
44.
Free Elective I
3
Course
45. ECEXXX Major Elective II
3 Major Elective
23. CSE255
3
2
2
26. MAT215 Mathematics IV
27. HSSXXX Humanities Elective I
Department of ECE
Computer Communication
Networks
Mini Project Lab and

Comprehension
Communication Systems
49. ECE386
and Networks Laboratory
50. HSSXXX Humanities Elective III
Fibre Optic
51. ECE403
Communications
48. ECE387
52. ECE404 Microwave Devices

53.
Free Elective II
54. ECEXXX Major Elective III

55. ECEXXX Major Elective IV
Optical Communication
56. ECE484
Laboratory
Microwave Devices
57. ECE483
Laboratory
58. ECEXXX Self-Study Elective
59. ECE499 Project Work
Total Credits
Department of ECE
2
2
Professional
Core
3 Humanities
Professional
4
Core
Professional
VII
Core
Interdisciplinary
3
Course
3
Major Elective
3
VII
2
VIII
Professional
Core
3 Major Elective
10 Project Work
177
Attained
PEOs
Course
Component
Interdisciplinary
Course
Professional
4
Core
46. ECEXXX Minor Elective II

47. ECE306
Credits
Semester
Subject
Code
Sl. No.
PEO1 PEO2 PEO3
Curricular Components and PEO

100%
10.37%
90%
13.93%
0.00%
6.10%
0.00%
8.20%
80%
12.59%
9.63%
9.76%
7.41%
13.11%
70%
11.85%
60%
50%
48.17%
40%
64.75%
30%
58.52%
10.37%
20%
10%
15.24%
0%
0.00%
PEO2
PEO1
Mathematics and Basic Sciences
Basic Engineering
Professional Core
Major Elective
Project Work
Humanities
0.00%
PEO3
Interdisciplinary Course
Figure 1-1 Curricular Components and PEO
Department of ECE
COURSE DELIVERY METHODS

Table 1-4 Course Delivery Methods
Program Outcome
Course Delivery Method
Lectures
Lecture with Discussions
E-Learning / Online Courses

(Asynchronous mode of
interaction)
Tutorials
Case Studies
Group Discussions
Models/ Demonstrations
Laboratory sessions
Projects/ Mini-Projects
Industrial Visit
10 11 12
Seminars/ Workshops/ Guest

Lectures
Self-Study Topic
Department of ECE
Semester I
Code No.
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
Course
PEOs
POs
7,8,9,10,
11,12
HSS101
English for Technical

Communication I
MAT103
Mathematics I
1,2,4
PHY131
Physics I
1,2,6,7
CHY106
Chemistry
1,2,6,7
CSE102
Programming Languages
1,2,3,5,6,7
EEE101
Basic Electrical and

Electronics Engineering
1,3
1,2,6,7,12
PHY182
Physics Laboratory
1,3
CSE181
Programming Language
Laboratory
1,3
18
19
1,4,5,8,9,
10
1,2,3,4,5,
8,9,10
Total
Semester II
Code No.
Course
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
PEOs
POs
HSS102
English for Technical

Communication II
8,9,10
MAT104
Mathematics II
1,2
PHY132
Physics II
1,2,6,7
CIV101
Basic Civil and Mechanical

Engineering
1,2
CHY102
Environmental Sciences
1,2,6,7,10,
11, 12
MEC101
Engineering Drawing
1,3,9,10
MEC103
Engineering Mechanics
1,2
MEC181
Workshop
1,3
1,2,4,5,6,
8,9,10
CHY182
Chemistry Laboratory
1,3
1,2,9
Soft Skills
1
Total
Department of ECE
20
22
10
Semester III
Code No.
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
Course
POs
1,2
MAT202
Mathematics III
PEOs
1
ECE201
Electron Devices
1,2,3
1,2,3,7,12
ECE203
Network Analysis
1,2,3
ECE205
Electronic Circuits
1,2,3
1,2,3,7,12
1,2,3,4,7,
8,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,12
1,2,3
1,3
1,2,3
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
12
1,2,3
3,4,5
ECE209
CSE255
ECE284
CSE295
Electromagnetic waves and

Transmission Lines
Data Structures and
Algorithms
Electron Devices and
Circuits Laboratory
Data Structures and
Algorithms Laboratory
Soft Skills
1,2,3
Total
18
26
Semester IV
Code No.
Course
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
PEOs
1
MAT215
Mathematics IV
HSS**
Humanities Elective I
ECE206
Signals and Systems
1,2,3
ECE208
Control System
Engineering
1,2,3
ECE210
Digital Design using HDL
1,2,3
ECE211
Linear Integrated
Electronics
1,2,3
ECE283
Integrated Electronics
Laboratory
1,2,3
ECE285
HDL Programming
Laboratory
1,2,3
POs
1,2
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
1,2,4,5,8,
9,10,11,12
1,2,3,7,8,
9,10,12
1,2,3,5,7,
8,9,19,12
1,2,3,4,5,7
8,9,10,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
12
Soft Skills
1
Total
Department of ECE
18
27
11
Semester V
Code
No.
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
Course
1,2,3
1,2,3
18
26
PEOs
ECE301
Digital Signal Processing
1,2,3
ECE304
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
1,2,3
ECE307
Analog and Digital

Communication
1,2,3
ECE308
ECE***
ECE***
ECE381
Computer Organization and

Architecture
Major Elective I
1,2,3
Minor Elective I
Digital Signal Processing
Laboratory
1,2,3
ECE385
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers Laboratory
1,2,3
ECE388
Community Project Mini

Project Lab and Comprehension
1,2,3
POs
1,2,3,7,8,
12
1,2,3,4,5,
7,8,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
1,2,3,4,5,
7,9,12
1,2,3,4,5,6
,7,8,9,10
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
Total
Semester VI
Code
No.
Course
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
PEOs
POs
1,2,6,7,8,
9,10
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
ECE306
Computer Communication
Networks
1,2,3
ECE309
VLSI Design
1,2,3
ECE***
Major Elective II
1,2,3
ECE***
Minor Elective II
Free Elective I
1,2,3
1,2,3
3
3
0
0
0
0
3
3
HSS**
Humanities Elective II
ECE386
Communication Systems and

Networks Laboratory
1,2,3
ECE387
Community Project Mini

Project Lab and Comprehension
1,2,3
18
24
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
Total
Department of ECE
12
Semester VII
Code No.
Course
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
PEOs
POs
1,2,3,7,12
ECE403
Fibre Optic
Communications
1,2,3
ECE404
Microwave Devices
1,2,3
HSS**
Humanities Elective III
1,2,5,7,8,
9,10,11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
Free Elective II
1,2,3
ECE***
Major Elective III
1,2,3
ECE***
Major Elective IV
1,2,3
ECE483
Microwave Devices
Laboratory
1,2,3
ECE484
Optical Communication
Laboratory
1,2,3
18
24
24
10
24
13
1,2,3,4,5,6
,7,8,9,10,
12
1,2,3,4,5,6
,7,8,9,10,
12
Total
Semester VIII
Code No.
Course
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
PEOs
ECE***
Self-Study Elective
1,2,3
ECE499
Project Work
1,2,3
POs
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
Total
Total Credits: 181
Department of ECE
13
Major Elective
Code No.
Course
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
PEOs
1,2,3
POs
ECE316
Antenna and Wave

Propagation
ECE317
Measurements and
Instrumentation
1,2,3
ECE318
Information Theory and

Coding
1,2,3
ECE320
Satellite Communication
1,2,3
ECE322
Embedded and Real Time

systems
1,2,3
Analog Mixed Signal

Design
Electromagnetic
Interference and
compatibility
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,5,6,7,
12
ECE325
Robotics and Automation
1,2,3
1,2,3,4,5,8
,9,10,11,
12
ECE341
Television Engineering
1,2,3
1,2,3,7,12
Advanced Digital Signal

Processing
Advanced Digital System
Design
Multimedia Compression
Techniques
1,2,3
ECE345
Industrial Electronics
1,2,3
ECE346
Opto Electronics Devices
1,2,3
1,2,3,5,8,9
,10,12
1,2,3,4,5,
10,11,12
1,2,3,5,6,
7,12
1,2,3,4,5,
7,10,11,12
1,2,7,10,
12
Telecommunication
switching and networks
Telecommunication system
modelling and simulation
1,2,3
1,2,7,12
1,2,3
1,2,3,5,8,
9,10,12
ECE349
Radar and Navigation Aids
1,2,3
1,2,6,7,12
ECE350
Engineering Acoustics
1,2,3
ECE351
Testing of VLSI Circuits
1,2,3
1,2,6,7,8,
9,12
1,2,3,4,5,
7,12
ECE323
ECE324
ECE342
ECE343
ECE344
ECE347
ECE348
Department of ECE
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,2,3,7,12
1,2,3,5,6,
7,8,9,10,
12
1,2,5,6,7,8
,12
1,2,3,4,7,
9,11
1,2,3,4,5,6
,7,8,9,10,
11,12
1,2,3,4,5,
10,11,12
14
ECE352
ARM Processor
architecture and
applications
1,2,3
1,3,5,7,9,
10,12
ECE353
Consumer Electronics
1,2,3
1,2,6,7,12
ECE358
Nano-electronics
1,2,3
ECE359
DSP based system design
1,2,3
ECE425
Network management
1,2,3
ECE426
Spread Spectrum
Techniques
1,2,3
1,2,3,4,5,
10,11,12
1,2,3,4,5,6
,7,8,9,10,1
1,12
1,3,4,5,7,
12
1,2,3,4,5,6
,7,8,9,10,
12
ECE429
Digital Image Processing
1,2,3
1,2,3,7,12
ECE430
Microwave Integrated
Circuits
1,2,3
ECE431
Wireless Communication
1,2,3
ECE432
DSP Integrated Circuits
1,2,3
1,2,3,5,11,
12
1,2,4,6,
7,8,9,10
1,2,3,4,5,
12
ECE433
Speech and Audio Signal

Processing
1,2,3
ECE434
Cryptography and network

security
1,2,3
ECE435
High speed switching

Architecture
1,2,3
ECE436
DSP Architecture
1,2,3
ECE437
Advanced Microprocessors
1,2,3
ECE438
Low power VLSI design
1,2,3
ECE439
RF MEMS
1,2,3
ECE440
RF circuit design
1,2,3
ECE441
Wavelets and Multi

Resolution Processing
1,2,3
ECE442
Reliability Engineering
1,2,3
ECE443
Wireless Sensor Networks
1,2,3
ECE444
Avionics
1,2,3
Department of ECE
1,2,7,12
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,10,
12
1,2,4,5,7,
12
1,2,3,4,5,
12
12,3,4,5,7,
12
1,2,3,4,5,
7,12
1,2,3,4,5,
7,12
1,2,3,4,5,
7,12
1,2,3,4,5,
7,8,12
1,2,3,6,8,
9,10,11
1,2,3,4,5,
7,12
1,2,3,5,7,
12
15
ECE445
Integrated Circuit
Verification
1,2,3
1,2,6,7,12
ECE446
RFID and applications
1,2,3
1,2,3,4,5
,6,7,8,9,
10,11,12
1,2,3,7,12
Minor Electives
Code No.
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
Course
EEE355
Soft Computing
PEOs
1,2,3
EEE365
Electrical Machines
1,2,3
1,2,3,4,5,
6,7,8,9,
10,11,12
INT355
Internet and Web

Technology
1,2,3
1,2,3,7,12
EIE355
Advanced Control Systems
1,2,3
1,2,12
CSE355
Artificial Intelligence
1,2,3
1,2,7,12
EIE365
Medical Electronics
1,2,3
1,2,7,12
Neural network and fuzzy

logic
Bio-Medical
instrumentation
Microcontroller Based
system design
1,2,3
1,2,12
1,2,3
1,2,12
1,2,3
CSE408
Grid computing
1,2,3
1,2,3,4,5,
7,8,12
1,2,3,6,9,
10,11
INT315
Bluetooth Technology
1,2,3
1,3,4,6,11
EIE315
Virtual Instrumentation
1,2,3
1,2,4,12
MEC416
Industrial Safety
Engineering
1,2,3
MEC320
Finite Element Analysis
1,2,3
1,2,5,8,9,
12
1,2,5,7,8,
9,12
EEE410
EIE409
EIE415
POs
Humanities Electives
Code No.
HSS001
Objective(s)s &
Outcome
Course
Total Quality Management
Department of ECE
PEOs
3
POs
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
16
HSS002
Engineering Management
HSS003
Indian Economic
Development
HSS004
Industrial Psychology
HSS005
Consumer Psychology
HSS006
Professional Ethics
HSS007
Operations Management
HSS008
Introduction to Economics
HSS009
Applied Economics
International Trade and

Finance
Information Systems for
Managerial Decision
Making
Advertising and Media
Services
Cost Analysis and Control
Introduction to Marketing
Management
Management Concepts and
Techniques
HSS016
Organizational Psychology
HSS017
International Economics
HSS018
Communication Skills
HSS019
Operations Research
Human Resource
Management
Public Finance in Theory
and Practice
Banking Theory and
Practice
Entrepreneurship
Development
HSS010
HSS011
HSS012
HSS013
HSS014
HSS015
HSS020
HSS021
HSS022
HSS023
Department of ECE
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,8,9,10,1
1,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10
,12
6,7,8,9,10
,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
12
6,7,8,9,10,
12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
6,7,8,9,10,
11,12
3
3
3
17
L
T
P
C
ENGLISH FOR TECHNICAL
COMMUNICATION I
2
0
0
2
Basics
in
English
Prerequisite
Objective(s) To train the students on improving their listening, speaking, reading and writing
skills.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Listen and comprehend different spoken excerpts critically and infer unspoken and
implied meanings.
CO2
Speak convincingly, express their opinions clearly, initiate a discussion, negotiate,
and argue using appropriate communicative strategies.
CO3
Read different genres of texts, infer implied meanings and critically analyse and
evaluate them for ideas as well as for method of presentation.
CO4
Write effectively and persuasively and produce different types of writing
Mapping of COs with POs
CO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1
M
L
CO2
L
L
H
M
L
CO3
H
L
L
CO4
L
L
H
M
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Sessional Examination-I
Course Entry/Exit Survey
Sessional examination-II
Exit Interview
Sessional Examination-III
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
End Semester Examination
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
FOCUS ON LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION
What is Communication? Verbal and Non-Verbal communication-Extra linguistic factors for
communication. Building Vocabulary-Word Formation; Prefixes and Suffixes-Synonyms &
Antonyms. Appropriateness of Expressions-Replacing an item with a suitable word-Match the
words-Cloze Reading-Skimming-Scanning. Definitions-Definitions for terms-Etymology of
Scientific Terms-Words with the same roots.
LISTENING SKILLS
Listening with Comprehension-Taking notes while listening-Listening to documentaries, radio
broadcasts, TV newscasts, Pod casts-Types of Listening & Tips for Effective Listening. English
in Conversation-Dialogue Writing-Telephonic Conversation. Familiarizing with Major English
Accents-British Accent (BBC)-American Accent (CNN) - Indian Accent (Doordharshan, NDTV,
etc). Language Focus-Articles-Prepositions-Present Tenses ( Simple, Progressive, Perfect and
Perfect Continuous)
SPEAKING SKILLS
Making Short Speeches-Giving Instructions-Recommendations-Role plays-Communicating
Politely. Oral Presentation Strategies-organizing Contents-Body Language/ Kinesics
Paralinguistic. Preparing a Concise paragraph for Presentation-hot topics like Soccer 2010 at
South Africa-World Tamil Conference at Kovai in 2010-Threatening Global Economic meltdownPlace of Technology in Modern Mans Life- Internationalism- Microbes and Mysterious
Ailments-looming Cultural Conflicts. Language Focus-Past Tenses (Simple, Progressive, Perfect
and Perfect)-Verbs-transitive & intransitive-Active Voice & Passive Voice-Direct SpeechIndirect Speech.
HSS101
Department of ECE
18
READING SKILLS
Reading Aloud-Reading articles in English Newspapers, Sport magazines, Weekline, Subjectrelated periodicals. Comprehension- Reading passages and answering questions-Guessing
Meaning from context. Reading and Note making-Outline /Linear Methods of Note-makingSentence method of Note-making-Schematic/mapping Method of Note-making. Language FocusJumbled Sentences-Replacing words with the noun forms of verbs-Conditional Clauses
WRITING SKILLS
Right Words and Phrases- Use familiar, concrete and specific words-Use of Abbreviations
Avoiding clichs, jargons and foreign words. Construction of Sentences-Sentence Constructionparagraph development Kinds of paragraphs. Effective Construction of Paragraphs-Avoiding
needless repetitions-identifying cluttering phrases-Rearranging words and phrases- Providing
transitional words. Language Focus-Future Tenses (Simple, Progressive)- Comparison of
Adjectives.
TEXT BOOK
1. Devaki Reddy and Shreesh Chaudhary: Technical English. Chennai: Macmillan, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeeta Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for
Engineers. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2014.
2. Oxford Advanced Learners Dictionary. OUP, 9th edition, 2015.
3. Raymond Murphy. Murphys English Grammar. Cambridge University Press, 2012
4. M. Asraf Rizvi. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers,
2013.
L
T
P
C
MATHEMATICS I
(Common to all Branches)
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite Basics in Mathematics
Objective(s)
To make students acquire knowledge in matrix theory, a part of linear algebra,
which has wider application in engineering problems.
To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their
convergence so that the students will be familiar with infinite series
approximations for solutions arising in mathematical modelling and to solve
first and higher order differential equations and to use Laplace transform to
solve differential equations using only algebraic operations.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Perform elementary matrix and vector operations and use them in applications.
MAT103
CO2
Find derivatives of functions and use derivatives to solve applied problems.
CO3
Use polar coordinates in solving problems.
CO4
Apply definition, concepts of analytical geometry.

CO
CO1
H
H
M
CO2
H
H
M
CO3
H
H
M
CO4
H
H
M
Department of ECE
19
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
MATRICES
Characteristic equation Eigenvalues and Eigen vectors of areal matrix PropertiesCayleyHamilton theorem (excluding proof)Orthogonal transformation of asymmetric matrixto
diagonal formQuadratic formReduction of quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal
transformation.
APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIALCALCULUS
Curvature Cartesian and Polarco-ordinates Radius of curvatureCircle of curvature
Evolutes Envelopes Evolute as envelope of normals.
FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES
Partial derivativesTotal derivatives - higher order partial derivatives- Eulers theorem for
homogenous functions - Taylors expansion JacobiansMaxima and Minima Constrained
maxima and minima by Lagrangian multiplier method.
ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Solutions of second and higher order linear ODE with constant coefficients - Cauchys and
Legendres linear equations - Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients
- Method of variation of parameters.
THREE DIMENSIONAL ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY
Direction cosines and ratios - Angle between two lines - Equations of a plane - Equations of
straight line - Coplanar lines - Shortest distance between two skew lines - Sphere - Tangent plane
- Plane section of a sphere - Orthogonal spheres.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Kreyszig, E, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Limited,
Singapore, 10th Edn., 2011.
2. Arumugam, S., Thangapandi Isaac, A., Somasundaram, A., Mathematics for Engineers,
Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai Edn-2012
REFERENCES
1. Grewal , B.S., Grewal, J.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, 37th Edition., 5thReprint,2005.
2. Venkataraman, M. K., Engineering Mathematics First Year, The National Publishing
Company, Chennai, 2nd Edition., 2012.
3. IIIA, The National Publishing Company, Chennai, 11th Edition., Reprint 2002.
L
T
P
C
PHYSICS I
3
0
0
3
(common to all Branches)
Prerequisite Basics in Science
Objective(s)
To make a bridge between the Physics in School and Engineering Courses
PHY131
Department of ECE
To develop an ability to identify, formulate and solve Physics and

Engineering problems.
20
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply the knowledge of acoustics in engineering
CO2
Analyse the working of lasers and fibre optics
CO3
Apply the knowledge on properties of engineering materials in solving real

world problems.

CO
CO1
H
M
L
CO2
H
M
L
CO3
H
M
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS

Classification of sound decibel Weber Fechner law - Reverberation theory - Sabines formula
derivation of Sabines equation Acoustic design of a Hall Common acoustical defects and
their remedies - Production of ultrasonic by magnetostriction and piezo electric methods
Acoustical grating SONAR - depth of sea pulse echo system through transmission and
reflection modes A, B and C scan displays
MODERN OPTICS
Laser and its properties Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einsteins coefficients Population inversion Pumping The principle pumping schemes Gas laser (Co2 laser) Solid
state laser (Nd-YAG laser) - Semiconductor laser - Hologram -construction and reconstruction
process General ideas of optical fibre Numerical aperture and Acceptance angle of fibre
Types of optical fibre - Applications.
CRYSTALLOGRAPHY
Crystalline and amorphous solids lattice and unit cell seven crystal system and Bravais lattices
Miller indices d-spacing in cubic lattice - Calculation of number of atoms per unit cellAtomic
radiusCoordination numberPacking factor for SC, BCC,FCC and HCP structures Crystal
preparation by slow evaporation and Czochralski method - Braggs law for X-ray diffraction
Laue method Powder method
QUANTUM PHYSICS
Introduction - Black body radiation-Plancks hypothesis- Photo electric effect Compton effect Wave nature of matter- de-Broglie waves Davisson and Germer experiment, Shrodingers wave
Department of ECE
21
equation (Time dependant and time independent equations)- particle confined in a one
dimensional potential well Eigen values and Eigen functions
PROPERTIES OF MATTER AND THERMAL PHYSICS
Elasticity- Hookes law- Relationshipbetweenthreemoduliofelasticity(qualitative)stress-strain
diagramPoissonsratioFactorsaffectingelasticityBendingmomentDepressionofacantilever
Youngs modulus by uniform bending- I-shaped girders
Specific heat capacity - definition - determination of specific heat capacity of liquid by Newton's
law of cooling. Thermal conductivity Forbes and Lee's disc methods
TEXT BOOKS
1. Palanisamy. P. K., Engineering Physics, SciTech publications, Chennai, 2014.
REFERENCES
1. Gaur. R. K., and Gupta. S. L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai & Sons,16th edition,
2013.
2. D. Halliday, R. Resnick and J. Waler., Fundamentals of Physics, 6th Edition, John Wiley
and Sons, New York, 2013.
3. William T. Silfvast, Laser Fundamental, 2nd Edition, Cambridge University Press, New
York, 2008.
4. Arthur Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics - Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2003.
5. Wilson, I. and Hawkes. J. F. B., Optoelectronics An Introduction, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2008.
6. Rajput B.S Pragati Prakashan, Advanced Quantum Mechanics, New Market, Begum
Bridge, Meerut, 2009
7. Brijlal and Subramaniam, Heat and Thermodynamics, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2014.
CHY106
CHEMISTRY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite Basics in Science

Objective(s) To make the students having a knowledge on water technology, electrodics,
engineering materials
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the macroscopic properties of system
CO2
Explain the principles and application of electrochemistry and corrosion science
CO3
Impart the knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment
methods and industrial applications
CO4
Know the basic information and application of polymer chemistry,
nanotechnology and analytical techniques
CO5
Describe the various modern instrumental method and technique for chemical
analysis
Department of ECE
22
CO
CO1
H
M
M
M
CO2
H
M
M
M
CO3
H
H
H
H
CO4
H
M
CO5
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
WATER TECHNOLOGY:
Water quality parameters - Definition and expression - Importance and determination of Dissolved
oxygen (DO) content in water- Estimation of hardness (EDTA method) - Determination of
alkalinity - Water softening (zeolite) - Demineralisation (Ion- exchangers) and Desalination
Boiler feed water - Domestic water treatment.
MACROSCOPIC PROPERTIES OF SYSTEMS IN EQUILIBRIUM:
Basic concepts of thermodynamics- Mathematical form of First law and its limitations-EnthalpyApplications of first law (relation between Cp and Cv only) - Second law of thermodynamics
(Clausius and Kelvin statement) - Entropy changes for reversible and isothermal processes
Problems - Free energy and work function, Gibbs-Helmholtz equation- Applications-ProblemsVant Hoff isotherm - Problems- Phase equilibria- Application to one component systems, two
component systems (Pb-Ag).
ELECTRODICS:
Electrochemical series and its applications - Determination of single electrode potential by using
reference electrodes - EMF measurements and its applications- problems- Nernst equationProblems- Electrochemical energy systems: Primary batteries-Lechlanches cell; Secondary
batteries- Lead Acid battery, Hydrogen - Oxygen fuel cell - Principles of chemical and
electrochemical corrosion - Corrosion control (Sacrificial anode and impressed current methods)
ENGINEERING MATERIALS:
Introduction, Classifications, Types, Preparation, Characteristics, Properties and Applications of
Polymers, (polyethylene, TEFLON, PET, PVC, PC, Nylon6,6, PU) rubber (Natural and
Synthetic) and composites materials (FRC and FRP)-Free Radical Mechanism- Thermoplastic &
Thermosetting plastics. Nanomaterials-Introduction, properties and application
INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS:
Fundamental principles, theory, instrumentation and applications : UV-Visible spectroscopy, Gas
Chromatography (GC), Thermo gravimetric analysis (TGA), Scanning Electron Microscopy
(SEM), principles, theory, instrumentation and applications of Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy
(AAS).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Atkins P. W., Physical Chemistry, Sixth Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011.
2. Jain P.C. and Monica J., " Engineering Chemistry ", Dhanpat Rai Publications Co.,(P) Ltd.,
New Delhi, 14th Edition 2004.
3. Sharma, B.K., Instrumental Methods of Analysis ", Goel publishing House, 12th Edition
2014.
Department of ECE
23
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Puri B. R., Sharma L. R., and Pathania M.S., Principles of Physical Chemistry, (2008),
Vishal Publishing Co.,2009
2. Kuriakose, J.C. and Rajaram J., Chemistry in Engineering and Technology ", Vol. I and II,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publications Co.Ltd, New Delhi ,1996
3. Kund and Jain, Physical Chemistry ", S. Chand and Company.1996.
4. Gordon M.Barrow, Physical Chemistry ", Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
5. Willard, H.H., Merritt. I.I., Dean J.A., and Settle, F.A., Instrumental methods of analysis ",
Sixth edition, CBS publishers, 1986.
6. Vogel A.I., " Quantitative Inorganic analysis ", 5thEdition, Longman, 1969.
7. Rouessac, F., Chemical Analysis-Modern instrumental methods and techniques ", WileyPublishers 1999.
8. J. B Park, Biomaterials Science and Engineering, Plenum Press, New York, 1984.
9. T. Pradeep, Nano: The essentials , McGrew Hill, 2008
10. C. N. R. Rao, A. Muller, A. K. Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis,
Properties and Applications WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, 2004.
L
T
P
C
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES
2
0
0
2
Prerequisite Basics in Mathematics , Computing
Objective(s)
To develop the basic programming skills
To understand the basic concepts of arrays and pointers
To implement file concepts and operations
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, students should be able to:
Demonstrate the knowledge of the steps in the development of computer program.
CO2
Formulate the structure of C program.
CO3
Apply the control structures, arrays, strings, functions and pointers in C
programming.
CO4
Demonstrate proficiency in computer programming.
CO
CO1
H
L
L
CO2
H
H
M
CO3
H
M
CO4
M
M
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
CSE102
Department of ECE
24
Course Topic(s)
BASIC ELEMENTS OF C & CONTROL STATEMENTS
Introduction to C programming C character set Identifiers, keywords, data types, constants,
variable, declarations, expressions, statements, symbolic constants, Operators and ExpressionsOperator precedence and associativity of operators -Input and Output Functions-Library
Functions - Header Files - Simple Computational problems. Decision Making: if statement - ifelse statement - else-if ladder Looping statements While do-while- Still more looping-For
statement, Nested control statements- switch statement the break statement - ? : operator Continue statement - goto statement Problems using Control Structures.
USER DEFINED FUNCTION FUNCTIONS & STORAGE CLASSES
Need for User defined functions, a multifunction program- Elements of user defined functionsDefinition of Functions- Return values and their Types- Function Calls-Function declarationCategory of functions- Nesting of functions Recursion- Problems on functions & recursion
functions. Storage Classes -Automatic Variables -External Variables Static and Register
Variables.
ARRAYS AND POINTERS
Defining and Processing an Array - Passing Arrays to Functions - Multidimensional Arrays Arrays and Strings - Enumerated data types-Programs using sorting, searching and merging of
arrays. Pointer Fundaments - Pointer Declarations - Passing Pointers to Functions - Arrays and
Pointers - Pointers and One-Dimensional Arrays - Pointers and Multidimensional Arrays Operations on Pointers-Programs using Pointers with Functions.
DYNAMIC MEMORY MANAGEMENT, STRUCTURES & UNIONS
Dynamic Memory Allocation Allocating a Block of memory, multiple blocks, releaseing used
space, altering the size of block. Defining a Structure - Processing a Structure User defined
Data Types Nested structure - Structures and Pointers - Passing Structures to Functions - Self
Referential Structures- Arrays and & Structures Union.
DATA FILES AND UNIX OS
Opening and Closing a Data File - Creating a Data File Reading & writing a data file. Processing
and Updating of Data Files - Unformatted Data Files - Programs using merging, searching of data
file contents. Introduction to Operating System. Shell fundamentals- shell commands File
commands- Directory commands-Miscellaneous commands
TEXT BOOKS
1. Byron S. Gottfried, Programming with C, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006
REFERENCES
1. Brian W. Kerninghan and Dennis M.Richie, The C Programming language, Pearson
Education,2005.
2. Johnsonbaugh R.and Kalin M, Applications Programming in ANSI C, Third Edition,
Pearson Education, 2003.
3. E. Balagurusamy Programming in ANSI C fourth edition TMH 2008
4. V.Rajaraman Computer Basics and C Programming PHI 2008
5. Stephen Kochan and Patrick Wood, UNIX Shell Programming, Third Edition, Pearson
education 2003.
Department of ECE
25
L
T
P
C
BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS
EEE101
ENGINEERING
3
1
0
4
Prerequisite Basics in Physics
Objective(s) To familiarise the students on basics of electronics and electrical engineering like
working and characteristics of electron devices, electrical machines.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Illustrate the basics concepts of electric circuits, magnetic circuits and
communication system
CO2
Acquire knowledge of the operations of electrical machines
CO
CO1
H
L
L
H
L
CO2
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
Network terminologies Sources Source transformation Series, Parallel circuits Voltage,
Current divider rules Ohms Law and its limitations Kirchhoffs laws Cramers rule Mesh
analysis Nodal analysis DC Transients (RL, RC circuits) AC fundamentals Sinusoidal and
non-sinusoidal waveforms Frequency, Time period, Instantaneous value, Average value,
Maximum value, RMS value, Form factor, Peak factor, Phase and phase difference Single phase
circuits: R, L and C behaviours, RL, RC and RLC circuits, Apparent power, Real power, Reactive
power, Complex power, Resonance analysis Network theorems (DC and AC): Superposition,
Thevenins, Nortons, Millmans, Reciprocity, Tellegens, Maximum Power Transfer theorems
Star-Delta Transformation
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS, ELECTRICAL MACHINES
Moving coil and moving iron instruments Wattmeter Energy meter DC Motor, Induction
motor, Generator and Transformers: Construction, Principle of operation
ELECTROSTATICS
Vector analysis Coulombs law Gauss law and applications Electric potential Conductors
and Dielectrics in static electric field Electric flux density and Dielectric constant Boundary
conditions for electrostatic field Capacitance and capacitors Electrostatic energy and forces
Poissons and Laplaces equations Uniqueness of electrostatic solutions Method of Images
Boundary-value problems
MAGNETOSTATICS
Fundamental postulates of Magnetostatics in free space Vector magnitude potential BiotSavart Law and its applications Magnetic dipole Magnetisation and Equivalent current
densities Magnetic field intensity and relative permeability Boundary conditions for
Department of ECE
26
Magnetostatic fields Inductances and Inductors Magnetic Energy Magnetic forces and
torques
BASIC ELECTRONICS
Review of atomic theory - Energy band structure of conductors, semiconductors and insulators
Density distribution of available energy states in semiconductors Extrinsic semiconductors PN
junction diodes Zener diodes BJTs, FETs Number systems Logic gates Universal gates
- Boolean algebra DeMorgans Theorem SOP, POS forms
TEXT BOOKS
1. Abhijit Chakrabarti, Sudipta Nath, Chandan Kumar Chanda, Basic Electrical Engineering,
TMH, 2009
2. S. K. Bhattacharya, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Pearson India, 2012
3. Smarajig Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, PHI, 2nd Edition,
2010
REFERENCES
1.
R. K. Rajput, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Laxmi Publishers, 2007
2.
Hughes revised by McKenzie Smith with John Hilcy and Keith Brown, Electrical and
Electronics Technology, Pearson India, 8th Edition, 2012
3.
David K. Cheng, Field and Wave Electromagnetics, Pearson India, 2nd Edition, 2013
L
T
P
C
PHYSICS LABORATORY
0
0
3
1
Prerequisite Basics of Physics
Objective(s) To develop an ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering problems using
basic physics.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Develop the observation and analytical skills
CO2
Explain the various properties of matter
CO3
Analyse the different optical properties
CO
CO1
M
L
H
H
H
CO2
H
L
H
H
H
CO3
H
L
L
H
H
H
Course Topic(s)
List of Experiment:1. To determine the acceleration due to gravity using Compound Pendulum
2. To determine the Rigidity Modulus of wire using Torsional Pendulum
3. To find thickness of the given two glass plates using single optic lever.
4. To determine the thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
5. To determine the refractive index of the material of the prism.
6. To find the number of rulings per cm length of the given transmission grating.
7. To determine the particle Size Using Laser
8. To determine the coefficient of viscosity of the liquid by Poiseuilles method
PHY182
Department of ECE
27
9. To determine the youngs modulus of given material using Uniform Bending
10. To Determine the thickness of a given material using Air wedge method
11. To determine the focal length of a biconvex lens using Newtons Rings method
12. To determine the velocity of ultrasonic waves in the given medium using ultrasonic
Interferometer.
13. To determine the band gap determination of a semiconductor
14. To find the value of Hall Co-efficient of semi-conductor
15. To find the value of Plancks constant by using a photo electric cell
16. To find the dielectric constant of liquids
CSE181
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES
LABORATORY
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
1
Prerequisite None
The objective of this course is to get an introduction and survey of artificial
Objective
intelligence methods for robots. It covers both the theory and the practice of
unmanned systems, focusing on biological and cognitive principles that are often
quite different from control theory formulations.
Course Outcomes
CO1
Work in various application packages
CO2
Write a C program effectively using arrays, pointers
CO3
Perform basic Unix commands and shell programming
CO
CO1
H
L
H
CO2
M
H
M
H
L
CO3
L
L
Course Topics
APPLICATION PACKAGES
1. Word Processing
2. Spreadsheet
3. PowerPoint
4. Database Management
C PROGRAMMING
5. Basics
6. Operators and Expressions
7. I/O formatting
8. Control Statements
ARRAYS AND FUNCTIONS
9. Arrays
10. String Manipulation
11. Functions
POINTERS, STRUCTURES AND FILES
12. Pointers
Department of ECE
28
13. Structures and Unions
14. File Handling
UNIX PROGRAMMING
Basic Unix Commands
15. Basic Shell Programming
HSS102
ENGLISH FOR TECHNICAL

COMMUNICATION II
(Common to all branches)
Prerequisite HSS101
To improve the students communication skills
Objective
Course Outcomes
CO1
Communicate effectively in both written and oral forms
CO2
Write different forms of business and technical report effectively
CO3
Execute editing and proof reading in manuscript preparation
CO
CO1
L
H
CO2
L
L
H
CO3
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topics
ASPECTS OF COMMUNICATION
Communication through Words- Process of communication- Barriers to communicationImportance of communication- Corporate communication. Communication through Body
Language- Personal Appearance- Posture Gestures- Facial Expression- Eye Contact. Space
Distancing. Communication through Technology-Word Processor- Desk top Publisher (DTP)Power point Presentation- Electronic Mail-Voice Mail. Language Components- The Auxiliariesbe and its forms; Have and its forms; do and its forms.
ORAL COMMUNICATION:
Dyadic Communication- Face to-Face Conversation- Interview-Instruction- Dictation. Public
Speaking and Oral Presentation. Preparatory Steps- Structuring the contents- Audience
Awareness-Modes of Delivery-vocal Aspects- Time Management- Speeches for Special
Occasions. Group Discussion- Group Dynamics- Purposes Organization. Language ComponentsModal Auxiliaries.
WRITTEN COMMUNICATION:
Department of ECE
29
Reading Comprehension-Reading Techniques- Helpful hints for Comprehension exercise. Prcis
Writing- Forms of Condensation-Skills Required for Prcis Preparation- Guideline- Practical
Hints.
Style of Writing- Importance of Professional Writing- Features of
Written
Communication- Choice of Words and Phrases- Sentence Structure- Paragraph Structure- Topic
Sentences. Language Components- Verbs- mood, Indicative mood, Imperative mood &
Subjunctive Mood.
BUSINESS AND TECHNICAL REPORTS:
Forms of reports- Preparing Questionnaires- Letter Reports- Memo Reports- Formal Reports.
Memorandum Writing- Contents- Types Structure. Introduction to Official CommunicationNotices- Agenda Minutes. Language Components- Adverbs-Interrogative Adverbs & Relative
Adverbs- Position of Adverbs
MECHANICS OF MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION:
Editing and proof reading- proof reading symbols- Punctuation- Capitalization. Words often
Confused- Words commonly spelt wrongly. Common Errors- use of Pronouns- use of Verbs- use
of Infinitives, Gerunds and Participles- Use of Prepositions. Language Components- Conjunctions
Coordinating Conjunctions- Subordinating Conjunctions.
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Krihsna Mohan and Meera Banergji ; Developing Communication Skills, 2nd edition,
Macmillan, 2009
REFERENCES
1. David Green : Contemporary English Grammar, Structures and Composition. Chennai:
Macmillan, 2000.
2. Krishna Mohan and Meenakshi Raman. Effective English Communication. New
Delhi; Tata McGraw-Hill Education Private Ltd. 2009.
3. Oxford Advanced learners English Dictionary, 9th edition, 2015
4. M. Ashraf Rizvi. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers,
2010
5. Sarah Freeman. Written Communication in English. Orient Longman,1977
MAT104
MATHEMATICS II
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite MAT103
Objective
Acquire knowledge to use multiple integrals to find area and volume of surface
and solids respectively.
Have a good grasp of analytic functions, complex integration and their
interesting properties and its applications.
Course Outcomes
CO1
Acquire more knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics
CO2
Improve problem evaluation technique
CO3
Choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem.
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
H
M
Department of ECE
30
CO3
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topics
UNIT I: MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
9
Review of Riemann integrals Double integration Cartesian and polar coordinates
change of order of integration change of variable between Cartesian and polar Area as double
integral Triple integration in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical polar coordinates volume as
triple integral.
UNIT II: VECTOR CALCULUS
9
Gradient, Divergence and Curl Directional derivative Irrotational and Solenoidal vector
fields Vector integration Greens theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stokes
theorem (excluding proof) Simple applications.
UNIT III: ANALYTIC FUNCTION AND CONFORMAL MAPPING
9
Function of a complex variable Analytic function Necessary conditions Cauchy
Riemann equations Sufficient conditions (excluding proof) Properties of analytic function
Harmonic conjugate Construction of Analytic functions Conformal mapping - w = z+a, az,
1/z, e z , sin z, cos z and bilinear transformation.
UNIT IV: COMPLEX INTEGRATION
9
Statement and application of Cauchys integral theorem and integral formula Taylor and
Laurent expansions Isolated singularities Residues Cauchys residue theorem Contour
integration over unit circle and semicircular contours (excluding poles on boundaries)- evaluation
of real integrals using contour integration .
UNIT V: APPLICATIONS OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
9
Solutions of ODE related to electric circuit, bending of beams, motion of a particle in a
resisting medium and simple harmonic motion.
TEXT BOOKS
Singapore, 8th Edition, 2011
2. Arumugam, S., Thangapandi Isaac, A., Somasundaram, A., Mathematics for Engineers,
Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai Edn-2011.
REFERENCES
Delhi, 37th Edition., 5th Reprint 2005.
2. Venkataraman, M. K., Engineering Mathematics First Year, The National Publishing
Company, Chennai, 2nd Edition, Reprint 2003.
3. Venkataraman, M. K., Engineering Mathematics IIIA, The National Publishing Company,
Chennai, 11th Edition., Reprint 2002..
Department of ECE
31
L
T
P
C
PHYSICS II
(common to all branches)
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite Basic knowledge about structure of solids and its types
Objective
To gain knowledge on and understand about the solid state materials,
conducting, semi-conducting, superconducting, magnetic, dielectric, optical
materials.
PHY132
To learn the latest development on new engineering materials.
To gain some knowledge about the different materials characterization

techniques
Course Outcomes
CO1
Explain how conducting materials are influencing engineering design.
CO2
Demonstrate magnetic and electrical properties of materials.
CO3
Describe the fundamentals of polarisable solids, optoelectronic materials and their
applications.
CO4
Identify the suitability of magnetic materials for its specific application.
CO
CO1
H
CO2
H
M
CO3
H
L
L
CO4
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topics
CONDUCTING AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS
Classical free electron theory of metals drawbacks - Quantum free electron theory of metals and
its importance (Qualitative) - Fermi distribution function Density of energy states and carrier
concentration in metals Fermi energy Band theory of solids classification of solids
Superconductor - definition Meissner effect type I &II super conductors BCS theory
(qualitative) high temperature superconductors Josephson effect quantum interference
(qualitative) SQUID applications.
SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS
Intrinsic semiconductors - carrier concentration (derivation) Fermi energy Variation of Fermi
energy level with temperature - Mobility and electrical conductivity Band gap determination Extrinsic semiconductors - carrier concentration in n-type (derivation) - Variation of Fermi level
with temperature and impurity concentration Variation of Electrical conductivity with
temperature Hall effect Experiment and applications of Hall effect
MAGNETIC AND DIELECTRIC MATERIALS
Department of ECE
32
Origin of magnetic momentBohr magnetoncomparison of Dia, Para and Ferromagnetism
Domain theory Hysteresis soft and hard magnetic materials anti ferro magnetic materials
Ferrites and its applications
Electrical susceptibility dielectric constant electronic, ionic, orientational and space charge
polarization frequency and temperature dependence of polarisation internal field Claussius
Mosottirelation (derivation) dielectric loss dielectric breakdown
ADVANCED MATERIALS
Metallic glasses Preparation, properties and applications - Shape memory alloys characteristics,
properties and applications of Nitinol Nanomaterials - introduction and properties synthesis
chemical vapour deposition pulsed laser deposition Non linear materials Harmonic
generation - Bio-materials Classification and applications - Liquid Crystals: types nematic,
cholesteric, smectic modes: dynamic scattering, twisted nematic display systems
MATERIALS CHARACTERIZATION
Structural Analysis: X-ray diffraction methods - Powder method Scherrer formula for estimation
of Crystallite size. Morphology: Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) - Atomic force microscopy
- Instrumentation and result analysis. Thermal Analytical Techniques: Principles, methodology
and use of differential thermal analysis and thermo gravimetric analysis
TEXT BOOKS
1. Selvanayagam, S. & Mani, P. Engineering Physics-II, DHANAM Publications, Chennai,
2014.
REFERENCES
1. Raghavan, V., Materials Science And Engineering: A First Course, 5th Ed, Prentice- Hall
of India Pvt. Ltd., 2009
2. William F.Smith, Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering, 3rd Edition,
McGraw-Hill, New York, 2003.
3. Charles Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 8th Edition, Wiely, 2004
4. Cullity B. D, Stock. S.R., Elements of x-ray diffraction. Prentice Hall, 3rd edition, 2001
5. John C. Vickerman, Ian Gilmore, Surface Analysis: Principle Techniques John Wiley
& Sons, 2nd edition, 2009.
6. Hobarth Willard, Lynne Merritt, John Dean, Instrumental Methods of Analysis,
Wadsworth Publishing Company, 7 Sub edition, 1988.
7. Introduction to thermal analysis by M.E. Brown, Springer, 2001.
8. Thin Film Fundamentals, A.Goswami, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
Department of ECE
33
L
T
P
C
BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL
4
0
0
4
ENGINEERING
Prerequisite Basics in science
The objective of the course is
Objective
To impart basic knowledge in the field of Civil Engineering focusing building
materials, surveying, foundation and transportation Engineering
To impart basic knowledge in the field of Mechanical Engineering focusing on
generation of power from various natural resources and to know about various
types of Boilers and Turbines used for power generation and to understand the
working of IC engines and basic manufacturing processes
Course Outcomes
CO1
Identify the nature of building components, functions, construction practices,
material qualities and transportation Engineering
CO2
Describe the working principle of boilers, turbines and various power plants
CO3
Describe the construction and working of IC engines
CO4
Describe the manufacturing processes like casting, welding, machining
operations
CO
CO1
M
M
CO2
M
CO3
M
CO4
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topics
CIVIL ENGINEERING
BUILDINGS
Characteristics of good building materials such as stones, bricks, plywood and ceramic tiles,
timber, cement, aggregates and concrete - Basic functions of buildings Major components of
buildings Foundations - Purpose of a foundation Bearing capacity of soils types of
foundations. Proper methods of construction of Brick masonry Stone masonry Hollow Block
masonry. Beams Lintels Columns Flooring Damp proof course surface finishes Doors
and windows Roofing.
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING
Principles and Classification of surveying, Chain surveying, Compass surveying and leveling Importance of roads Classification of Highways water bound macadam, bituminous and cement
concrete roads . Railways - Importance of railways Gauges Components of a permanent way.
CIV101
Department of ECE
34
Bridges - Components of Culverts Causeways, Slab Bridge, T-beam and slab bridge, Suspension
bridge
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
BOILERS AND TURBINES
Boilers - boiler mountings and accessories Cochran boiler, Locomotive boiler, Babcock and
Wilcox boiler, fire and water tube boilers - Steam turbine - single stage impulse turbine, Parsons
reaction turbine, difference between impulse and reaction turbines.
POWER PLANTS AND INTERNAL COMBUSTION (IC) ENGINE
Classification of power plants steam, nuclear, diesel and hydro power plants - Alternate sources
of energy - solar, wind, tidal, geothermal, ocean thermal energy conversion. IC engine components, working of four and two stroke petrol and diesel engines.
PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY
Metal casting and forming process patterns, moulding, melting of cast iron, casting forging
rolling extrusion drawing - Metal joining process - welding arc welding, gas welding,
brazing and soldering - Metal machining lathe, drilling machine, milling machine, shaping
machine, planing machine, introduction to Computer Numerical Control machining.
TEXT BOOK
1. Shanmugam, G,, and Palanichamy, M.S., Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, May 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Khanna, K., Justo C E G, Highway Engineering, Khanna Publishers, Roorkee, 2011
2. Arora S.P. and Bindra S.P., Building Construction, Planning Techniques and Method of
Construction, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi 1997.
3. Venugopal
K.,
Basic
Mechanical
Engineering,
Anuradha
Publications,
Kumbakonam,2000.
4. Shanmugam G., Basic Mechanical Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.,New
Delhi, 2001.
L
T
P
C
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES
(Common to all branches)
2
0
0
2
Objective
Imparting knowledge on principles of environmental science and
engineering.
Understanding the concepts of ecosystem, biodiversity and impact of
environmental pollution.
Awareness on value education, population and social issues.
Course Outcomes
CO1
Create the awareness on natural resources by having an understanding
environmental problems
CO2
Realize the benefits of ecology and biodiversity
CO3
Describe and analyze different levels of pollution and its management techniques
CO4
Recognize the importance of global warming and cooling of earths atmosphere
CO5
Categorize and understand about the relation between human population and
environment
CHY102
Department of ECE
35
CO
CO1
M
L
H
H
L
L
L
CO2
M
L
H
H
L
L
L
CO3
M
L
H
H
L
L
L
CO4
M
L
H
H
L
L
L
CO5
M
L
H
H
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topics
NATURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL RESOURCES:
Definition, scope, and importance of environmental sciences -Need for public awareness- Natural
resources: Forest resources, Water resources, Mineral resources, Energy resources, Land resources
- Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.
ECOSYSTEM AND BIODIVERSITY:
Concept of an ecosystem - Structure and function of an ecosystem - Energy flow in the ecosystem
- Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids - Ecological succession
- Biodiversity
Definition, value of biodiversity- Hot spots of biodiversity - Threats to biodiversity Endangered and endemic species of India - Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity
ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION:
Types, sources, consequences and control measures of water pollution, ecological and biochemical
aspects of water pollution - Sources, effects and control measures of Air pollution, Soil pollution,
Marine pollution, Noise pollution, Thermal pollution and Nuclear pollution - Climate change,
global warming, acid rain, Tropospheric chemistry of zone-ozone layer depletion, nuclear
accidents and holocaust- Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
MANAGEMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION:
Causes, effects, treatments methods and control measures of solid waste, municipal waste,
hazardous waste and biomedical waste - Waste minimization techniques - Cleaner TechnologyGreen Chemistry- Principles and its role in controlling environmental pollution-Disaster
management: floods, earthquake, cyclone, landslides and Tsunami.
SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT:
Water conservation, rain water harvesting- Resettlement and rehabilitation of people- Wasteland
reclamation - Environmental impact assessment- Precautionary and polluters pay principleenvironment protection act air (prevention and control of pollution) act water (prevention and
control of pollution) act Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation Population explosion Family Welfare Programmes - Environment and human health - Human
Rights - Women and Child Welfare
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sawyer C. N, McCarty P. L, and Parkin G. F., Chemistry for Environmental Engineering,
McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, 5th edition, 2002.
2. Dhameja, S. K., Environmental engineering and Management, S. K. Kataria and sons, New
Delhi, 1st edition 2010.
Department of ECE
36
3. Gilbert M.Masters, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science, pearson
education Pvt., Ltd., Third edition, 2007.
4. Townsend C., Harper J and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell science,
3rd edition , 2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Miller T.G. Jr., Environmental science, wadsworth Publishing Co. USA, 14th edition 2013.
2. Bharucha erach, The Biodiversity of India, mapin publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad
India, 2006
3. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards, Vol. I and II, Enviro media.
4. Cunningham, W.P.Cooper, T.H.Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopedia, Jaico Publ.,
House, Mumbai, 2001.
5. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA,
1998.
6. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to air pollution, techno-science publications.
L
T
P
C
ENGINEERING DRAWING
1
0
3
2
Prerequisite Basics on mathematical drawings
Learn to sketch and take field dimensions. Learn to take data and transform it in to
Objective
graphic drawings
Learn basic engineering drawing formats
Course Outcome
CO1
Perform basic sketching techniques
CO2
Draw orthographic projections and sections
CO3
Apply drawing techniques in visualisation of data and information of components
and systems in their engineering problems.
CO
CO1
L
M
L
H
CO2
L
M
L
H
MEC101
CO3
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION
Importance of graphics use of drafting instruments BIS conventions and specifications size,
layout and folding of drawing sheets lettering dimensioning and scales orthographic principles
missing view freehand sketching in first angle projection from pictorial views.
Department of ECE
37
PROJECTION OF POINTS , STRAIGHT LINES AND PLANES
Projection of points, located in all quadrants projection of straight lines located in the first
quadrant, determination of true lengths and true inclinations, location of traces projection of
polygonal surface and circular lamina located in first quadrant inclined to one or both reference
planes
PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND SECTION OF SOLIDS
Projection of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one
reference plane by change of position method types of section full section and half section
conventional section lines- section of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in
vertical position by cutting planes inclined to any one of the reference planes, obtaining true shape
of section.
DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids prisms, pyramids, cylinders and
cones development of lateral surfaces of combined solids.
ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION
Principles of isometric projection isometric view and projections of simple solids, truncated
prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones orthographic to isometric view Introduction to
perspective projection.
TEXT BOOK
1. Basant Aggarwal and C. Aggarwal, Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing
company, New Delhi , 2008
REFERENCES
1. Shah, M.B., and Rana, B.C., Engineering Drawing, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Natarajan, K.V., A text book of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers,
Chennai, 2006.
3. Bhatt, N.D., Engineerig Drawing, Charotar publishing House, N Delhi, 46th Edition,
2003.
4. Luzadder ad Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi, XI Edition, 2001.
5. Venugopal, K., Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002.
L
T
P
C
ENGINEERING MECHANICS
(Except CSE, IT and Bio-Tech)
3
0
0
3
To give an introduction on engineering mechanics concepts commonly used in
Objective
analysis and design of engineered structure
Course Outcome
CO1
Apply the concept of equilibrium to systems which can be modeled as particles in
2D and to rigid bodies in 2D
CO2
Analyze simple statically determinate structures
CO3
Apply fundamental concepts of kinematics and kinetics of particles to the analysis
simple engineering problems
CO4
Apply basic engineering mechanics concepts to real world engineering problems
MEC103
Department of ECE
38
CO
CO1
H
L
CO2
H
L
CO3
CO4
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
STATICS OF PARTICLES
Six Fundamental principles and concepts - vector algebra- basics, external and internal forces,
concurrent and non-concurrent coplanar forces - resultant and resolution static equilibrium of
particles in 2-D and 3-D,
STATIC OF RIGID BODIES
Moment about point and about axis - Varignons theorem - Static equilibrium of rigid body in 2D and 3-D, free body diagram, supports and reactions - Problem formulation concept in 2-D and
3-D.
FRICTION
Frictional forces- Types- laws of dry friction- simple contact friction - Sliding block, wedges,
ladder friction - rolling resistance - belt friction - Axle friction, disk friction Examples.
PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS
Centroids of lines - areas, volumes, composite bodies, Centre of gravity- center of mass - Area
moment of Inertia - principal moment of inertia
DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES
Introduction Kinematics of particles Displacements, velocity and acceleration, their
relationship - Equations of motions Rectilinear motions - relative motion Curvilinear motion
Kinetics of particles - Newtons second law Equations of motion rectangular components
Work Energy equation of particles.
TEXT BOOK
2. Beer, F.P., and Johnson, E.R., Vector Mechanics for Engineers Statics and Dynamics,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
REFERENCES
6. Merriam, J.L., Engineering Mechanics, Volume I Statics, and Volume II, Dynamics
2/e, Wiley International, 2008.
7. Irving , H., Shames, Engineering Mechanics, Statics and Dynamics, Prentice Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
Department of ECE
39
MEC181
WORK SHOP
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
1
Prerequisite
Know basic workshop process
Objective
Course Outcome
CO1
Perform works like carpentry, fitting, plumbing, arc welding, foundry, tapping,
fabricating sheet metal objects.
CO2
Identify select and use various marking, measuring, holding, striking and cutting
tools and equipments
CO3
Operate, control different machines and equipments
CO4
Produces jobs as per specified dimensions, requirements and constraints
CO5
Adapt safety practices while working on various machines
CO
CO1
L
CO2
L
L
L
M
L
CO3
L
M
L
CO4
M
L
L
L
L
CO5
H
M
M
L
Course Topics
CARPENTRY
Carpentry tools - practice in marking, sawing, planning and chiselling making simple joints: lap
joint, T-joint, dovetail joint, mortise and Tenon joint.
FITTING
Fitting tools - practice in marking, filing, punching, hacksawing - fitting to size and drilling making of simple mating profiles: V, square, dovetail, half round joints.
SHEET METAL
Study of press, die and tools - sheet metal layout - development of lateral surfaces -simple
exercises: blanking, forming, bending and flanging.
DRILLING
Drilling and tapping in drilling machines
Demonstration on:
1. Welding operations like butt joint and lap joints in Arc welding
2. Foundry operations like mould preparation for split pattern
3. Smithy operations like the production of hexagonal bolt
4. Preparation of plumbing line sketches basic pipe connections involving the fittings like
valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers, elbows and other components used in household
fittings.
Department of ECE
40
CHY182
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
1

Know to carry out basic chemical engineering process
Objective
Course Outcome
CO1
Estimate the strength of solution by chemical and instrumental methods.
CO2
Analyze the water quality parameters of given water samples.
CO3
Apply the chemical engineering concepts in solving engineering problems
CO
CO1
L
L
CO2
L
L
CO3
H
L
Course Topic(s)
List of Experiments
1. Estimation of hardness of water sample by EDTA method
2. Determination of alkalinity of given water sample
3. Determination of dissolved oxygen in a water sample
4. Determination of rate constant of a reaction (Ester hydrolysis)
5. Estimation of hydrochloric acid by pH titration
6. Estimation of chloride ion in a given water sample
7. Determination of sodium and potassium by flame photometry
8. Estimation of ferrous ion by potentiometric method
9. Estimation of iron by spectrophotometry using 1,10-phenanthroline
10. Determination of strength of mixture of acids using strong base by conductometric titration
11. Estimation of fluoride ion by spectrophotometry
12. Conductometric titration of strong acid with strong base
L
T
P
C
MATHEMATICS III
3
0
0
3
(ECE)
Prerequisite MAT103, MAT104
Objective(s) 1) To provide students with a sound foundation in mathematics and prepare them
for graduate studies in electronics and communication engineering.
2) To provide students with mathematics fundamentals necessary to solve
engineering process.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply Laplace transform in solving engineering problems.
CO2
Formate and solve partial differential equations of any order.
CO3
Find the Fourier series for a function defined on closed interval.
CO4
Solve difference equation using Z-transform.
CO5
Evaluate the Fourier transform of a continuous function.
MAT202
Department of ECE
41
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
LAPLACE TRANSFORM
Definition of Laplace Transform - Linearity property - condition for existence of Laplace
Transform - First & Second Shifting properties - Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals Unit step functions - Dirac delta-function - Differentiation and Integration of transforms Convolution Theorem - Inversion - Periodic functions - Evaluation of integrals by Laplace
Transform - Solution of boundary value problems.
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Formation of PDE Solution of std types of first order PDE Lagranges linear equation Linear
PDE of second and higher order with constant coefficients.
FOURIER SERIES
Dirichlets conditions General Fourier series odd and even functions Half range sine and
cosine series complex form of Fourier series Parsevals identity Harmonic analysis
Z TRANSFORM
Z-transform elementary properties Inverse Z-transform convolution theorem formation of
difference equation solution of difference equation using Z-transform.
FOURIER TRANSFORM
Fourier Integral formula - Fourier Transform - Fourier sine and cosine transforms - Linearity,
Scaling, frequency shifting and time shifting properties - Self reciprocity of Fourier Transform Convolution theorem -Application to boundary value problems.
TEXT BOOKS
Singapore , 8th Edn., 2002.
2. Arumugam, S., Thangapandi Isaac, A., Somasundaram, A., Engineering Mathematics
Volume II, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 1st Edn., Reprint 2004.
REFERENCES
Delhi, 37th Edn., 5th Reprint 2004, 2003.
2. Venkataraman, M. K., Engineering Mathematics III A, The National Publishing
Company, Chennai, 11th Edn., Reprint 2002, 1998.
3. Venkataraman, M. K., Engineering Mathematics - III B, The National Publishing
Company, Chennai, 13th Edn., Reprint 1999, 1998.
Department of ECE
42
ECE201
ELECTRON DEVICES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite PHY111, PHY112, EEE101, ECE205, ECE284

Objective(s) To familiarise the students with
Basic physics of semiconductor devices
The importance of electrons and holes in semiconductors, the charge
density and distribution, the charge transport mechanisms
The physics of p-n junction
The working of most semi-conductor devices and basic Opto-electronic
devices
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Analyse the basic physics of carrier transport in semiconductor devices
CO2
Analyse the characteristics of the p-n junction diodes
CO3
Analyse the characteristics of transistors
CO4
Apply their understanding about the behaviour of power control devices
CO5
Explain the functioning of optoelectronic devices and special function diodes
CO
CO1
H
H
H
CO2
H
L
M
CO3
H
H
L
CO4
H
H
M
L
CO5
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTORS
Energy band structure of conductors, semiconductors and insulators Density distribution of
available energy states in semiconductors Fermi-Dirac probability distribution function at
different temperatures Thermal generation of carriers Calculation of electron and hole densities
in intrinsic semiconductors Intrinsic concentration Mass Action Law
PN JUNCTION
Majority and Minority charge carriers Mobile charge carriers and immobile ions Drift current
in good conductors PN junction formation of depletion layer junction or barrier voltage
forward biased PN junction reverse biased PN junction reverse saturation current junction
breakdown junction capacitance equivalent circuit of a PN junction Diode Current equation
Mechanism of avalanche and Zener breakdown, Hall Effect, Effect of Temperature on
Breakdown Mechanism
Department of ECE
43
TRANSISTORS
BJT current components Emitter to Collector and Base to Collector current gains CB, CE and
CC characteristics Comparison Breakdown characteristics Ebers-Moll model Transistor
switching times Construction and Characteristics of JFET Relation between Pinch off voltage
and drain current MOSFET Enhancement and depletion Modes Introduction to CMOS,
BiCMOS
POWER TRANSISTORS
Metal Semiconductor Contacts Energy band diagram of metal semiconductor junction
Schottky diode, metal oxide semiconductor contacts and ohmic contacts Power control devices
Characteristics and equivalent circuit of UJT intrinsic standoff ratio PNPN diode Two
transistor model SCR, TRIAC, DIAC- Power devices, operation and characteristics: Thyristor
family, Power diodes, Power transistors, Power MOSFET - GTOs and IGBTs
OPTO-ELECTRONIC AND OTHER DEVICES
Liquid Crystal Displays - Light Emitting Diode Photo emissive devices Photovoltaic devices
Photoconductive Cells Photodiodes PN junction Photodiode PIN Photodiode Avalanche
Photodiode Piezoelectric Crystals CCD - Voltage Variable Capacitor Diodes Solar Cells
Tunnel Diodes Tunnel Diode Circuits - Display devices: Operation of LCDs, ACTFELs, Plasma
and field emission displays Basics of Lasers
TEXT BOOKS:
1.
David A. Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Oxford Press, 5th Edition, 2008
2.
Millman Jacob , Christos Halkias, Satyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits,
TMH , 3rd Edition, 2010
3.
S Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kumar, Electronic Devices and Circuits, TMH, 3 rd Edition,
2012
REFERENCES:
1.
Lindsay MacDonald, Anthony C. Lowe (Editors), Display Systems: Design and
Applications, Wiley International, 1997
2.
Albert Malvino, Electronic Principles, TMH, 7th Edition, 2008
3.
Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory,
Pearson India, 10th Edition, 2012
4.
N Deshpande, Electronic Devices and Circuits, TMH, 2007
5.
Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith and Arun N. Chandorkar, Microelectronic Circuits,
Oxford India, 6th Edition, 2013
6.
S. M. Sze, Kwok K. Ng, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Wiley India, 3rd Edition,
2007
Department of ECE
44
ECE203
NETWORK ANALYSIS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite MAT103, EEE101, MAT202, ECE205, ECE284

Electric circuits and networks, Resonance of circuits
Coupled circuits and their characteristics
First order transients and sinusoidal steady state analysis
Electric network models and parameters
Synthesis a network from its equation
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain concepts in graphical model used for description of electric networks.
CO2
Apply the basic network theorems to simplify, analyse and design large-scale
networks
CO3
Compute the impedance, resonance and responses for RLC circuits
CO4
Derive network parameters for two-port networks
CO5
Synthesize one-port and two-port networks
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
M
L
H
CO3
H
H
L
M
M
CO4
H
H
L
M
M
CO5
H
H
M
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
NETWORK BASICS AND THEOREMS
Elements and sources Graph of a network - Tree and Cotree Twigs and links Matrices
associated with graphs; incidence, fundamental cut set and fundamental circuit matrices Duality
- Linearity and non-linearity Distributed and Lumped parameters - Review of Network
Theorems (DC, AC) Review of steady state AC analysis Introduction to SPICE Analyses in
SPICE
RESONANCE, COUPLED CIRCUITS
Series, Parallel Resonance Resonant frequency for a tank circuit Variation of impedance with
frequency Bandwidth, Q factor of series and parallel resonance Conductively coupled circuits
Mutual Inductance Dot convention Coefficient of coupling Ideal Transformer Tuned
circuits
TRANSIENTS
Transients (DC, AC) of RL, RC and RLC networks Time domain analysis of RLC networks Transmission criteria: Delay and rise time, Elmores and other definitions
Department of ECE
45
NETWORK PARAMETERS
Two port network parameters Conversion between parameters Lattice Networks
Interconnection of twoport networks T and PI representation Terminated two port networks
NETWORK SYNTHESIS
Hurwitz polynomials Positive real function Synthesis of one port, two port networks
Synthesis of RL and RC networks by Foster and Cauer Methods State equations for networks
TEXT BOOK:
1. Sudhakar, S. P. Shyammohan, Circuits and Networks, TMH, 4th Edition 2010
REFERENCES:
1. William Hayt, Jack Kemmerly, Steven Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, TMH, 8 th
Edition, 2013
2. Valkenburg M.E. Van, Network Analysis, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2009 Franklin F. Kuo,
Network Analysis and Synthesis, Wiley India, 2nd Edition, 2009
3. B. R. Gupta, Vandana Singhal, Fundamentals of Electrical Networks, S. Chand Publishers,
2005
4. Aatre, Vasudev K., Network Theory and Filter Design, 3rd Edition, 2014
5. Syed Nasar, 3,000 Solved Problems in Electric Circuits, TMH, 2010
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
4
Prerequisite PHY112, MAT103, EEE101, MAT202, ECE201, ECE203, ECE284
Large and small signal characteristics of transistors and analysis of
amplifiers, Biasing circuits for transistors
Multi-stage amplifiers and Various power amplifiers
Feedback topologies, Positive feedback for oscillations
Condition for oscillator and generation of sinusoidal waveforms using
different types of oscillator circuits
Generation and shaping of pulses using transistor circuits
Application of diodes to rectify signals
Different types of power supplies and their designs
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Design amplifier circuits using transistors
CO2
Estimate properties of a feedback amplifier circuit
CO3
Design a sinusoidal oscillator circuit for the given specifications
CO4
Analyze the response of Power Amplifiers
CO5
Design pulse generators and pulse shaping circuits using transistors
CO6
Explain the functioning of power supply circuits
CO
CO1
H
H
M
H
CO2
H
L
H
CO3
H
H
M
M
H
ECE205
Department of ECE
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
46
CO4
CO5
CO6
H
H
H
H
H
L
M
M
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
SMALL SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS
Various amplifier circuit types, comparison - Biasing and bias stability of BJT and FET Small
Signal and Large Signal Equivalent circuits of diodes, BJTs, MOSFETs and analog CMOS: Low
and high frequency models, h-parameter analysis - Common Emitter amplifier design Common
Source amplifier design Frequency response of CS and CE amplifiers with active load - Source
and emitter follower - Direct Coupling between stages CapacitorCoupled Cascade Amplifiers
Two stage circuit with emitter follower output BIFET circuits Cascode amplifiers
FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS
Feedback topologies - Concept of stability, Gain Margin and Phase Margin - Types of feedback
Negative feedback amplifier-characteristics Effects of negative feedback
POWER AMPLIFIERS
Large signal/ Power amplifiers - Classification of Amplifiers Class A, class B and class AB
amplifiers Transformer coupled amplifier design modifications to improve amplifier
performance MOSFET power amplifiers - IC power amplifiers
SINUSOIDAL OSCILLATORS
Basic principles of sinusoidal oscillators condition for oscillations Barkhausen criteria
Hartley oscillator Clap Oscillator - Colpitts oscillator Crystal Oscillator RC phase shift
oscillator Wien bridge oscillator Oscillator amplitude stabilization
PULSE GENERATORS, SHAPERS AND POWER SUPPLIES
Multivibrators Waveform shaping circuits Schmitt trigger Blocking Oscillator Time Base
Circuits Simple diode circuits, clipping, clamping - Rectifiers with and without filters Ripple
factor Unregulated power supplies Linear mode power supply and switched mode power
supply, Crowbar circuit, Power/Voltage Protection circuits Introduction: Fuses, Grounding,
Shielding, Guarding Techniques, Thermal management, Heat sinks and types, Heat sink design
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Oxford Press, 5th Edition, 2008
2. Millman Jacob , Christos Halkias, Satyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, TMH ,
3rd Edition, 2010
3. S Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kumar, Electronic Devices and Circuits, TMH, 3rd Edition, 2012
REFERENCES:
1.
Albert Malvino, Electronic Principles, TMH, 7th Edition, 2008
2.
Robert L. Boylestad, Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, 11th
edition, 2012
Department of ECE
47
L
T
P
C
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND
3
0
0
4
TRANSMISSION LINES
Prerequisite MAT103, EEE101, MAT104, MAT202,PHY131
Maxwells equations
Electromagnetic fields, charges, currents
Applying 3-dimensional vector calculus to electromagnetic fields
Calculation of electromagnetic field distributions
Field concept underlying common electrical components
Graphical methods for analysis
Development and application of the general transmission line equation
Properties of guiding structures and cavities using common analysis
Course Outcome(s): Biological issues of EMI/EMC
CO1
Apply mathematical concepts of vector analysis to the solution of electrostatic and
magneto static problems.
CO2
Analyse and interpret solutions of Maxwells equation in electrodynamics.
CO3
Apply basic knowledge of antenna concepts including directivity, antenna gain,
effective area, radiation, resistance, antenna noise temperature, friis formula in
simple communication links.
CO4
Apply the distributed circuit concepts needed at HF, specifically to match
impedances and design HF components with an understanding of limitations of LF
and RF circuits.
CO5
Describe the proprieties of waveguide modes.
CO6
Describe dispersion and its effect.
CO7
Use and interpret a smith chart.
CO8
Apply reasoning informed by the knowledge on electromagnetic radiation and
interference.
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
H
M
L
L
CO3
H
M
L
CO4
H
M
L
L
CO5
H
M
CO6
H
CO7
H
M
M
CO8
H
H
H
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
ECE209
Department of ECE
48
Course Topic(s)
ELECTROSTATICS, MAGNETOSTATICS
Applications of Electromagnetic theory Differences between circuit theory and electromagnetic
theory Mathematical preliminaries Coordinate Systems Review of vector calculus Review
of Electrostatics Review of Magnetostatics
ELECTRODYNAMICS
Time varying fields and Maxwells equations: Electrodynamics, Equation of continuity,
Maxwells correction, Poynting theorem, Maxwells equations, Boundary conditions, Media
properties, Retarded potentials
WAVE THEORY, RADIATING SYSTEMS
Wave equations Electromagnetic waves Polarisation of waves Transmission and Reflection
Perfect conductor Perfect dielectric Lossy media Radiation field of dipoles Antenna
patterns and Parameters Thin linear Antenna
TRANSMISSION LINES
Transmission Lines: Definition and types Equivalent circuit Losses in lines Secondary
constant Analysis of uniform line Standing wave pattern Line impedance Input impedance
Secondary constants measurement Line sections UHF Lines as circuit elements Reflection
coefficient Standing waves Reflection loss SWR Impedance measurement Special types
of Lossless lines Line distortion Impedance matching Smith Chart
Transmission and Reflection Guided waves and Waveguides, Line equations and Impedance
WAVEGUIDES
General behaviours along uniform guiding structures Parallel plate waveguides Rectangular
waveguides Circular waveguides Dielectric waveguides Cavity resonators Dispersion
characteristics Microstrip transmission lines EMI/EMC, Effects of EMI, EMC standards and
its need, EMC standards in different countries, ESD, EMP, Biological effects of EMI/EMR
TEXT BOOKS
1.
R. S. Rao, Electromagnetic Waves and Transmission Lines, PHI, 2012
2.
G. S. N. Raju, Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines, Pearson India,
2009
3.
David K. Cheng, Field and Wave Electromagnetics, Pearson India, 2nd Edition, 2009
4.
William Hayt, John Buck, Engineering Electromagnets, TMH, 7th Edition, 2010
REFERENCES
1.
E. C. Jordan, K. G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, PHI, 2nd
Edition, 2007
2.
Joseph Edminister, Vishnu Priye, Electromagnetics (Schaums Outline Series), TMH,
2nd Edition, 2010
3.
Matthew N. O. Sadiku, Principles of Electromagnetics, Oxford India, 4th Edition, 2009
4.
John Kraus, Daniel Fleisch, Electromagnetics with Applications, TMH, 5th Edition,
2010
5.
D. Ganesh Rao, Electromagnetics and Transmission Lines, Pearson India, 1st Edition,
2009
6.
Deepa, S.R., Nair, B. Somanathan,
Applied Electromagnetic Theory: Analyses,
Problems and Applications, PHI, 2007
7.
Griffiths, David J., Introduction to Electrodynamics, PHI, 4th Edition, 2010.
Department of ECE
49
CSE255
DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite CSE102, CSE181

To learn the basics of abstract data types in data structures.
To learn the principles of linear and non- linear data structures.
To build an application using sorting and searching.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Able to understand the model of Abstract Data Type, calculation of algorithm
efficiency and designing of recursive algorithms.
CO2
Able to understand the concepts and applications of Stack, Queue and Linked list.
CO3
Able to analyse various sorting and searching algorithms.
CO4
Able to know the usage of Non-Linear Data structures in the application of trees
such as Binary Search tree, AVL Search tree and Heap tree.
CO5
Able to find the shortest path and minimum spanning tree for the given graph
CO
CO1
H
CO2
H
L
CO3
H
CO4
H
L
CO5
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
PROBLEM SOLVING
Problem solving Top-down Design Implementation Verification Efficiency Analysis
Sample algorithms.
LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES
Abstract Data Type (ADT) The List ADT The Stack ADT The Queue ADT
TREES
Preliminaries Binary Trees The Search Tree ADT Binary Search Trees AVL Trees Tree
Traversals Hashing General Idea Hash Function Separate Chaining Open Addressing
Linear Probing Priority Queues (Heaps) Model Simple implementations Binary Heap
SORTING
Preliminaries Insertion Sort Shellsort Heapsort Mergesort Quicksort External Sorting
GRAPHS
Definitions Topological Sort Shortest - path Algorithms Unweighted shortest paths
Dijkstras Algorithm Minimum Spanning Tree Prims Algorithm Applications of Depth
First Search Undirected Graphs Biconnectivity Introduction to NP-Completeness
TEXT BOOK
1.Dromey R. G., How to Solve it by Computer, PHI, 2012.
Department of ECE
50
REFERENCES
1.Langsam Y., Augenstein M. J., Tenenbaum A. M., Data Structures using C,
2.Pearson Education Asia, 2014
3.Richard F. Gilberg, Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Structures A Pseudocode Approach with
C, Thomson Brooks, 2004.
4.Aho. et.al., Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson Education Asia, 1983.
L
T
P
C
ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
3
0
0
2
LABORATORY
Prerequisite MAT103, EEE101, MAT104.
Basic experimental experiences in physical operation and circuit
applications of semiconductor devices
Design and analysis of the electronic circuits
Simulation and design of electronic circuits using SPICE
Design and develop the circuit, from drawing circuit diagram to complete
PCB for the given specifications
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Use/Operate Multimeters, Power supplies, Oscilloscopes and Function Generators
CO2
Design, simulate, construct, and take measurement of various analog circuits to
compare experimental results in the laboratory with theoretical analysis
CO3
Work as part of a team effectively.
CO4
Formalize the experiment's procedures and results by writing a formal report
CO
CO1
M
M
H
CO2
M
M
H
H
L
M
CO3
L
M
M
L
M
H
CO4
L
M
M
L
H
M
Course Topic(s)
1.
Identification, Study and Testing of various electronic components, devices and
software tools:
a. Passive components like Resistors, Capacitors, Variable Resistor/Pot; Active
components like BJTs, FETs, UJTs; Optoelectronic devices like Photo diode, Photo
transistor, LED, LDR, Solar cell, LASER, Opto-coupler, LCD
b. Instruments/Devices like Multimeter, Ammeter, Voltmeter, FG, RPS, CRO (Analog
and Digital Storage), Breadboard, Transformer, PCB, Soldering Kit, Crocodile clips,
probes, Cables, Connectors, Battery types, Relays (Mechanical and Electronic)
c. Study of a Digital Storage CRO and store a signal on it
d. SPICE Software GUI/Schematic entry based DC, AC, Transient Analyses
(ANY ONE OF: QUCS Open Source/ LTSpice IV Freeware/ NGSPICE Open
Source/ Texas TI Free version/ 5Spice Free version/ Microcap Proprietary)
e. PCB Software
ECE284
Department of ECE
51
(ANY ONE OF: Free PCB Open source/ Eagle Freeware/ Express PCB Free
version/ Orcad PCB - Proprietary)
f. Referring data sheets of components/devices
2.
Design PCB layouts for the circuits verifying Kirchoffs laws and Ohms law, using a
software tool
3.
Plot V-I characteristic of P-N junction diode using breadboard
4.
Transistor Characteristics
a. Plot I/O characteristics of BJT in CE configuration. Find h-parameters. Use SPICE and
breadboard. Compare the values.
b. Plot the characteristics of FET, CMOS, using SPICE
c. Switched mode operation of the BJT using SPICE
5.
Design a biasing circuit for BJT. Use breadboard
6.
Amplifiers
a. Plot frequency response of BJT CE amplifier with and w/o negative f/b using
breadboard
b. Design a simple audio amplifier using LM386 (or similar IC audio amplifier) on
breadboard and amplify the sound from a mp3 player or a Radio (or any other audio
source) to a speaker; Observe the frequency response on a CRO/DSO; Observe the
effect of variation in passive components on gain/volume of output frequency (Bass
Low frequency/ Treble High frequency).
c. Plot frequency response curve for single stage amplifier, two - stage direct coupled
amplifier and determine gain bandwidth product, using SPICE
7.
Plot the characteristics of UJT and UJT as relaxation. Use breadboard
8.
Oscillators, Pulse Generators
a. Design a transistor phase shift oscillator and observe the effect of variation in R and C
on oscillator frequency, using SPICE.
b. Flash one/two LEDs whose flash rate is controlled by the time constant values of a
Multivibrator (BJT). Determine the flash rate (frequency) using CRO and compare it
with theoretical value. Use breadboard
9.
Power Supplies
a. Study Zener diode as voltage regulator. Observe the effect of load changes and
determine load limits of the voltage regulator. Use breadboard.
b. Design a Bridge rectifier and measure the effect of filter network on D.C. voltage
output and ripple factor using SPICE and compare values with circuit developed on
bread board.
c. Design and analyse Transistor Series Voltage Regulator using SPICE.
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory manual, ECE Department Kalasalingam University
2. http://www.sentex.ca/~mec1995/tutorial/xtor/xtor6/xtor6.html
3. Practical Electronics Handbook, Ian Sinclair, John Dunton, 6th Edition, Newnes/Elsevier
4. Starting Electronics, Keith Brindley, 4th Edition, Newnes/Elsevier
5. Practical Electronics for Inventors, Paul Scherz, Simon Monk, 3rd Edition, TMH
6. Make: Electronics: Learning Through Discovery (e-book Kindle Edition), Amazon.com
Department of ECE
52
L
T
P
C
DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS
3
0
0
2
LABORATORY
Prerequisite Students should have basic programming knowledge in C, particularly structures
and pointers concepts along with capability to understand basic algorithmic
concepts
1. To learn the systematic way of solving problems.
Objective(s)
CSE295
2. To understand the different methods of organizing large amounts of data.

3. To introduce the practical and formal aspects of data structures
4. To teach methodologies useful for the implementation and empirical evaluation
of sorting and searching algorithms.
5. To efficiently implement the solutions for specific problems using data
structures.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Demonstrate the concept of linear and nonlinear data structures.
CO2
Determine the efficiency of algorithms.
CO3
Design of algorithms for various searching and sorting techniques
CO
CO1
H
H
L
CO2
H
H
L
CO3
H
H
L
Course Topic(s)
IMPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING EXERCISES USING C
1. Array implementation of List Abstract Data Type (ADT)
2. Linked list implementation of List ADT
3. Cursor implementation of List ADT
4. Array implementations of Stack ADT
5. Linked list implementations of Stack ADT
The following three exercises are to be done by implementing the following source files
(a) Program for Balanced Parenthesis
(b) Array implementation of Stack ADT
(c) Linked list implementation of Stack ADT
(d) Program for Evaluating Postfix Expressions
An appropriate header file for the Stack ADT should be #included in (a) and (d).
6. Implement the application for checking Balanced Parenthesis using array
implementation of Stack ADT (by implementing files (a) and (b) given above)
7. Implement the application for checking Balanced Parenthesis using linked list
implementation of Stack ADT (by using file (a) from experiment 6 and implementing file
(c))
8. Implement the application for Evaluating Postfix Expressions using array and linked list
implementations of Stack ADT (by implementing file (d) and using file (b), and then by
using files (d) and (c))
9. Queue ADT
10. Search Tree ADT Binary Search Tree
11. Heap Sort
12. Quick Sort
Department of ECE
53
MAT215
MATHEMATICS IV
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite MAT103, MAT104, MAT202

Objective(s) Teach students to characterise phenomena of probabilistic in nature, understand
and apply numerical methods for solving systems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Able to characterize phenomena which evolve with respect to time in probabilistic
manner
CO2
Solve engineering problems with more than one random variable and functions of
random variables
CO3
Analysis the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems
CO4
Acquire knowledge on spectral density which describes the average frequency
content of a random process
CO5
Analyse the interpole values , numerical integration for ordinary differentiate
equations.
CO
CO1
H
L
CO2
H
L
CO3
H
L
CO4
H
L
CO5
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
PROBABILITY & RANDOM VARIABLES
Classical, relative frequency and axiomatic definitions of probability, addition rule and conditional
probability, multiplication rule, total probability, Bayes Theorem, and independence. Discrete,
continuous and mixed random variables, probability mass, probability density and cumulative
distribution functions, mathematical expectation, moments, moment generating function.
STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS
Binomial, Geometric, Poisson, Exponential, Gamma, Normal distributions, Function of Random
Variables. Joint, marginal and conditional distributions, correlation, regression lines.
RANDOM PROCESSES
Classification, Stationary and Markov processes, Binomial process, Poisson process, Sinewave
process, Ergodic processes.
CORRELATION FUNCTION AND SPECTRAL DENSITY
Auto correlation for discrete and continuous processes, Cross correlation functions, Correlation
integrals. Applications, Linear systems with random inputs.Power spectral density, Cross spectral
density, Applications to linear systems with random inputs.
Department of ECE
54
NUMERICAL METHODS
Newtons forward and backward difference formulae Lagranges interpolation formulae
Divided differences. Initial value problems for ordinary differential equations: Fourth order
RungeKutta method. Milnes predictor corrector method.
TEXT BOOK
1. Kapur J.N. and Saxena H.C., Mathematical statistics, S.Chand & Company Ltd, New
Delhi,2006.
REFERENCES
1. Flynn M., Probability, Random variables and random processes, Harper & Row
Publishers, New York, 1982.
2. Peebles Jr., Probability, Random variables and random signal principles, McGraw Hill
Publishers, 2002.
3. S.Arumugam et.al., Numerical Methods, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai,
2010
ECE206
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite MAT103, MAT104, MAT202, MAT215, ECE203

Describing signals mathematically and performing mathematical
operations on signals
Commonly used signals such as the unit step, ramp, and impulse function,
sinusoidal signals and complex exponentials, and classifying signals as
continuous-time or discrete-time, as periodic or non-periodic, as energy or
power signals, and as having even or odd symmetry
Linear time invariant systems description either using linear constant
coefficient differential equations or using their impulse response and
finding a state space representation of a system from a block diagram and
vice versa
Various system properties such as linearity, time invariance, presence or
absence of memory, causality, bounded-input bounded-output stability and
identifying whether a given system exhibits these properties and its
implication for practical systems
Process of convolution between signals, its implication for analysis of
linear time invariant systems and the notion of an impulse response
Solving a linear constant coefficient differential equation using Laplace
transform techniques
The intuitive meaning of frequency domain and the importance of
analyzing and processing signals in the frequency domain
Computation of the Fourier series or Fourier transform of a set of welldefined signals from first principles, and using the properties of the Fourier
transform to compute the Fourier transform (and its inverse) for a broader
class of signals
Department of ECE
55
The application of Fourier analysis to ideal filtering, amplitude modulation

and sampling
Knowledge of frequency-domain representation and analysis concepts
using Fourier Analysis tools, Z-transform
Mathematical and computational skills needed in application areas like
communication, signal processing and control, which will be taught in
other courses
Concepts of random process applied to electronic signals and systems,
sampling process
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
Classify signals and systems and describe their properties on continuous and
discrete domains
CO2
Perform different domain transformations
CO3
Analyze the input-output relationship of linear, time-invariant systems using timedomain techniques and transform methods
CO4
Determine the mathematical model of linear time-invariant systems in s-domain
CO5
Demonstrate an understanding of users/applications of techniques studied.
CO
CO1
H
L
L
L
L
H
CO2
H
H
CO3
M
M
M
CO4
H
L
H
CO5
M
H
L
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
Classification of signals Transformation of the independent variable, Exponential and sinusoidal
signals, Continuous and discrete time Signals Basic System Properties, Linear Invariant Systems
Convolution Sum, Convolution Integral, Properties of LTI systems - Inner products Vector space
and axioms Inner product, Cauchy-Schwarz inequality Analogy between vectors and signals
Noise and its types Colours of noise Additive noise, Multiplicative noise, Poisson noise, Phase
noise, Transient noise, Burst noise.
FOURIER SERIES
Fourier series representations of CT periodic signals, Convergence and properties of CTFS,
Trigonometric Fourier Series, Exponential Fourier Series; Gibbs Phenomenon, Fourier series
representations of DT periodic signals, properties of DTFS, Fourier Series and LTI Systems
Bessels inequality and Parsevals relations.
Department of ECE
56
FOURIER TRANSFORM
Continuous time Fourier Transform Representation of aperiodic Signals, Fourier transform for
periodic Signals - properties of the CTFTSystem Characterized by linear constant coefficient
differential equations Discrete Time Fourier Transform Representation of aperiodic Signals
DTFT for Periodic signals - properties of the DTFT System Characterized by linear constant
coefficient difference equations Introduction to Hilbert space and Hilbert transform.
LAPLACE TRANSFORM
Laplace definition region of convergence properties analysis and characterization of LTI
systems Inverse Laplace transform solution of differential equations Application of Laplace:
Realization of structures, Direct form I, II Cascade and Parallel form structures.
Z TRANSFORM
Z- Transform and its properties ROC and its properties Inverse z-transform using Contour
integration Residue Theorem, power series expansion and Partial fraction expansion Analysis
and Characterization of LTI systems using Z transform. Realization of structures-Direct form I, II
Cascade and Parallel form structures Introduction to Random signals, Response of linear system
to random inputs Introduction to Sampling, Reconstruction of signals from its samples.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oppenheim, Alan V., Willsky Alan S., Nawab S. Hamid, Signals and Systems, PHI, 2 nd
Edition, 2013
2. I. Ravi Kumar, Signals and Systems, PHI, 1st Edition, 2013
REFERENCES:
1. Harish Parthasarathy, Textbook of Signals and Systems, I. K. Publishers, 2004
2. Samir S. Soliman Mandyam D. Srinath, Continuous and Discrete Signals and Systems, PHI,
2005
3. Hwei Hsu, Schaum's Outline of Signals and Systems, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2010
4. Kunze, Ray, Hoffman, Kenneth, Linear Algebra, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2009
5. Charles L. Phillips, Signals, Systems and Transforms, Pearson India, 4th Edition, 2013
6. B. P. Lathi, Principles of Linear Systems and Signals, International Version, Oxford India, 2nd
Edition, 2009
ECE208
CONTROL SYSTEM ENGINEERING
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite MAT103, MAT104, MAT202, ECE203, ECE205.

Study the principles of system modelling, system analysis and feedback control,
and use them to design and evaluate feedback control systems with desired
performance; in specific to acquire the related knowledge and techniques to meet
the following course Objective(s)s:
Control system modelling: modelling of electric, mechanical and
electromechanical systems, using differential equations, transfer functions,
block diagrams, and state variables;
Department of ECE
57
Control system analysis: analysis of properties of control systems, such as

sensitivity, stability, controllability, tracking, in time and frequency
domains; and
Control system design: design of feedback controllers, such as PID, lead
and lag compensators, pole placement designs, to meet desired system
performance specifications.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Model electric, mechanical and electromechanical systems and evaluate their
performance
CO2
Determine the time and frequency response of different order systems for various
step inputs
CO3
Analyse the criteria for stability of systems and use state space techniques for
analysing the control systems.
CO4
Design basic controllers and compensators.
CO
CO1
H
H
M
L
L
L
L
L
CO2
H
L
L
L
CO3
M
M
M
M
CO4
H
H
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
SYSTEM REPRESENTATION
Basic elements in control systems Open and closed loop systems Electrical analogy of
mechanical and thermal systems Transfer function Block diagram reduction techniques
Signal flow graphs Control system Components Applications
TIME RESPONSE
Time response Time domain specifications Types of test input I and II order system response
Error coefficients Generalized error series Steady state error P, PI, PID modes of feedback
control applications
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Frequency response Bode plot Polar plot Nichols chart Determination of closed loop
response from open loop response Correlation between frequency domain and time domain
specifications applications
STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM
Department of ECE
58
Characteristic equation Location of roots in S plane for stability Routh Hurwitz criterion Root
locus construction Effect of pole, zero addition Gain margin and phase margin Nyquist
stability criteria
COMPENSATION TECHNIQUES, STATE VARIABLES
Performance criteria Lag, lead and leadlag networks compensator design using Bode plots
applications Sate space analysis - State variables and SISO/MIMO control systems
Controllability and Observability Controllability, Observability for Discrete systems and
Continuous systems Stabilisability and Detect ability
TEXT BOOKS
1. J. Nagrath, Gopal, Madan, Control Systems Engineering, New Age, 5th Edition, 2011
2. Anand Kumar, Control Systems, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2014
REFERENCES
1. S Seshadhri, Subathra B, Control Systems, Vijay Nicole Prints, 2009
2. Kuo Benjamin C., Automatic Control Systems, PHI, 7th Edition, 2011
3. Katsuhiko Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, PHI, 5th Edition, 2011
4. D. Roy Choudhury, Modern Control Engineering, PHI, 2011
5. Norman S. Nise, Control Systems Engineering, Wiley India, 6th Edition, 2014
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
Prerequisite PHY 121, EEE101, PHY181, ECE201, ECE205, ECE281.
At the end of the course the student will be able to analyze, design and
implementation of digital circuits using modern FPGA architectures using
synthesizable HDL exploiting various features of state-of-the-art FPGA design
flow. Through lectures and laboratory assignments, students are provided learning
experiences that enable them to accomplish the Course Outcome(s)s as listed
below
Course Outcome(s)
Apply the fundamentals of converting one number system to another.
CO1
CO2
Apply Boolean algebra theorems and techniques to simplify logic functions.
Apply knowledge of logic gates to build combinational and sequential circuits.
CO3
Use typical design techniques for asynchronous and synchronous sequential
CO4
circuit.
Demonstrate the knowledge of the nomenclature and technology in the area of
CO5
memory devices sequential PLDs, FPGA and logic families.
Write program for combinational and sequential circuits using HDL
CO6
CO
CO1
H
CO2
H
H
CO3
M
M
H
M
L
L
L
H
CO4
M
M
H
M
L
L
L
H
CO5
H
L
M
ECE210
Department of ECE
DIGITAL DESIGN USING HDL
59
CO6
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
NUMBER SYSTEMS, CODES, DIGITAL ICs
Digital Logic Basic Gates-NOT, OR, AND, Universal Gates, positive and negative logic,
Introduction to HDL VLSI Design Flow and Methodologies - Number Systems and Codes
Binary number system, Octal numbers, Hexadecimal numbers, Excess-3 code, Gray code, Error
detection and Correcting codes number system conversions - Switching Circuits, 7400 TTL,
TTL parameters, Open collector Gate, 3 state TTL devices, external drive for TTL loads, TTL
driving external loads, 74C00 CMOS, CMOS characteristics, TTL to CMOS interface, CMOS to
TTL interface
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS
Combinational Logic Circuits Boolean laws and theorems, Sum-of-products, Truth table to
Karnaugh map, Pairs, Quads, Octets, Karnaugh map simplifications, Dont care conditions,
Product of sum method, Product of sum simplification, Simplification by Quine-McClusky
method, Hazards and Hazard covers, HDL implementation model - Data Processing Circuits
Multiplexers, De-multiplexers, 1-of-16 decoder, BCD-Decimal Decoder, Seven segment
decoders, Encoders, Parity generators and checkers, Magnitude Comparators, Programming
ROM, PAL, PLA, HDL implementation of data processing circuits - Arithmetic Circuits Binary
addition, Binary subtraction, Unsigned binary numbers, Sign-Magnitude numbers, 2s
Complement representation, 2s complement arithmetic, arithmetic building blocks, addersubtractors, Binary multiplication and division, HDL implementation of Arithmetic Circuits
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS
Flip-flops Gated Flip-Flops, Edge triggered Flip-Flops, Flip-Flop timing, JK Master-Slave FlipFlop, Switch Contact Bounce circuit, Various representation of Flip-flops, Analysis of Sequential
circuits, HDL implementation - Registers SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, Applications of shift
registers, HDL implementation - Counters Asynchronous counters, Decoding Gates,
Synchronous counters, Changing the counter modulus, Decade counters, Presettable counters,
Counter design as a synthesis problem, HDL implementation
SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
Model selection, state transition diagram, state synthesis table, design equations and circuit
diagram, Implementation using ROM, algorithmic state machine, state reduction technique
ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential Circuit, Problem with Asynchronous Sequential Circuit,
Design of Asynchronous Sequential Circuit, FSM implementation in HDL Memory and its types
Sequential PLDS FPGA Architecture
Department of ECE
60
TEXT BOOK
1.
Donald Leach, Albert Malvino, Goutam Saha, Digital Principles and Applications, TMH,
7th Edition, 2010
REFERENCES
1.
John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practices, Pearson India, 4th Edition,
2012
2.
M. Morris Mano, Digital Design, Pearson India, 5th Edition, 2013
3.
Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL
Design, TMH, 3rd Edition, 2012
4.
Frank Vahid, Digital Design with RTL Design, Verilog and VHDL, Wiley India, 2 nd
Edition , 2010
5.
Samir Palnitkar, Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis, PHI, 2010
L
T
P
C
LINEAR INTEGRATED ELECTRONICS
ECE211
3
1
0
4
Prerequisite PHY131, ECE201, ECE205.
The main Objective(s) of this course is to introduce the characteristics, analysis,
working principle and applications of Operational Amplifiers. The courses are
structured systematically that the graduates skills and knowledge is progressively
built on from the fundamentals to the more advanced in-depth skills and knowledge
in electronics.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain fabrication and realisation of IC, analog sub-circuits and various
differential amplifiers.
CO2
Infer the DC and AC characteristics of operational amplifiers and design the linear
and non-linear applications using operational amplifiers.
CO3
Analyse and design of filters and voltage regulators.
CO4
Analyse basic working principle operation and application of waveform generators
and PLL.
CO5
Classify and comprehend the working principle of data converter advanced of
operational amplifiers.
CO
CO1
H
L
H
CO2
H
H
L
L
L
L
H
CO3
H
H
M
L
M
H
L
L
L
H
CO4
H
H
M
L
H
L
L
M
H
CO5
H
M
L
L
L
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Department of ECE
61
Course Topic(s)
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, AMPLIFIER CONCEPTS
Linear vs. Digital electronics IC Classification IC Fabrication Assembly processing and
packaging Integrated devices Integrated transistors Monolithic (solid state) diodes, resistors,
capacitors, inductors FET ICs CMOS ICs Recent trends in IC technology Analog sub
circuits: Active devices, V-I characteristics of transistors review, Biasing of transistors review,
Transistor as switches, Current sources/sinks, Constant current biasing of MOSFETs
Differential Amplifiers: Emitter-Follower, Long-Tailed Pair, Concept of an incremental model,
Source follower, coupling, Darlington pair, Differential amplifiers, Active loading, Increasing
input resistance, JFET Differential amplifiers, Auto-zero and chopper stabilised Op-amps,
MOSFET Differential amplifiers, Level shifting
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
Ideal Op-amp Op-amp: Symbol, package, nomenclature, power supply connections - Practical
Op-amp General Op-amp Classification of op-amps IC741 Bipolar Op-amp - DC and AC
characteristics - Frequency compensation Open loop, Closed loop op-amp configurations
Applications: Sign changer (Phase inverter), Scale changer, Phase shifter, Voltage follower,
Voltage controlled voltage source, Current source, Inverting current amplifier, Current controlled
current source, V to I converter (Transconductance Amplifier), Current controlled voltage source
(C to V converter), Summing amplifier, Differencing amplifier, Averaging amplifiers, Scaling
adders, Instrumentation amplifier, Integrator, Differentiator, Logarithmic amplifier, Antilog
amplifier, Single power supply operation: inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, Analog
computation, V/F and F/V converter - Optical couplers/isolators - Op-amp comparators - Analog
switches - Peak detector High speed Sample and Hold circuits Zero crossing detectors Digital
coding of an analog amplitude Changing the transition level Wave shaping Regenerative
comparator (Schmitt trigger) Window comparators With Diode applications
FILTERS, VOLTAGE REGULATORS
Comparison between active and passive filters Active network design Filter approximation
General second order active filter with unity gain and variable gain Design of LPF, HPF, BPF,
BSF, All-pass filter State variable filter Switched capacitor filters Basics of voltage
regulators Linear voltage regulators using op-amp IC voltage regulators (78xx, 79xx) IC LM
117/317, 723 Regulators Dual tracking voltage regulator Voltage reference ICs - Switching
regulator
WAVEFORM GENERATORS, PLL
Op-amp: Square wave generator (Astable multivibrator), Mono-stable multi-vibrator, Triangular
wave generator, Sine wave generator, saw-tooth wave generator IC8038 Function generator
X2206 Function generator - 555 Timer and its applications CMOS Ring oscillator PLLs: Basic
principles Closed loop analysis IC PLL VCO IC VCO 566, LPF Monolithic PLL
Applications of PLL IC 565 Demodulator - Frequency synthesiser
A/D CONVERTERS, D/A CONVERTERS
Analog and Digital Interface Circuits D/A converters weighted resistor DAC - R-2R ladder
DAC inverted R-2R ladder DAC multiplying DAC monolithic DAC - A/D Converters- direct
type ADC parallel comparator ADC counter type ADC successive approximation ADC
change balancing ADC dual slope ADC - Sigma, Delta converters, Sample and Hold circuits
Over sampling ADC Advanced Op-amps: CMOS op-amp, BiFET and BiCMOS circuits, JFET
Department of ECE
62
Op-amps - Programmable Trans conductance Amplifiers (Operational Trans conductance
Amplifiers) - Video Amplifiers
TEXT BOOKS
1.
S Salivahanan, Y. S. Kanchana Bhaskaran, Linear Integrated Circuits, TMH, 2011
2.
S. P. Bali, Linear Integrated Circuits, TMH, 2008
3.
William D Stanley, Operational amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson India,
4th Edition, 2002
REFERENCES
1.
Gray, Hurst, Lewis, Meyer Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, Wiley
India, 5th Edition, 2011
2.
D. Roy Choudhury, Shail B. Jain, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age, 4th Edition, 2012
3.
Gayakwad, Ramakant A., OP-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, PHI, 4th Edition, 2009
4.
Sergio Franco, Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits, TMH,
3rd Edition, 2002
5.
David A Johns, Ken Martin, Analog Integrated Circuit Design, Wiley India, 4 th Edition,
2009
6.
K. Lal Kishore, Operational amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson India, 2009
7.
Texas Instruments (Ron Mancini Editor in Chief), Op amps for everyone, e-book
(http://www.ti.com/lit/an/slod006b/slod006b.pdf)
L
T
P
C
INTEGRATED ELECTRONICS
3
0
0
2
LABORATORY
Prerequisite PHY131, PHY132, EEE101, MAT202, ECE205, ECE284
To make students to be able to use the theoretical knowledge to analyze and design
basic electronic application circuits and to extend the understanding of how
electronic circuits and their functions fit into larger electronic systems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Design and analyze integrated circuit based application circuits
CO2
Design, develop and demonstrate a prototype/complete product employing analog
and/or digital ICs studied in this course
CO3
Work as part of a team effectively
CO4
Communicate the technical information by means of oral and written reports
CO
CO1
H
H
H
H
H
L
L
M
CO2
H
M
M
M
L
L
M
M
M
CO3
L
M
M
L
H
M
CO4
L
M
M
L
M
H
Course Topic(s)
1.
CMOS ICs (like CD4000 series), TTL ICs (like 7400 series), OP-AMP ICs (like 741,
324 IC Packaging, Pin identification, Referring Datasheet, Digital Trainer kit, Digital
I/O Signals, IC families and logic levels, PCB software (ANY ONE OF: Free PCB
ECE283
Department of ECE
63
Open source/ Eagle Freeware/ Express PCB Free version/ Orcad PCB Proprietary), SPICE Software GUI/Schematic entry based DC, AC, Transient
Analyses (ANY ONE OF: QUCS Open Source/ LTSpice IV Freeware/ NGSPICE
Open Source/ Texas TI Free version/ 5Spice Free version/ Microcap
Proprietary) - Familiarisation
2.
Interface Circuits
a. Interface a CMOS or TTL IC to LED using a transistor driven circuit
b. Interface a CMOS IC to TTL IC and TTL IC to CMOS IC under 5 volt supply
3.
Basic Logic Gates
c. Construct NOT gate, NOR gate using BJT;
d. Plot CMOS Inverter Characteristics using SPICE; Design UNIVERSAL gates
from CMOS inverter using SPICE
e. Verify NOT gate, XOR gate and UNIVERSAL gates operation using digital ICs.
4.
Half adder and full adder. D flip-flop using D FF IC.
5.
Design a system clock (square wave oscillator) built using CMOS (Schmitt) inverter
(IC74C14 or similar). Compare the frequency measured and calculated theoretically.
6.
Design and construct inverting amplifier and non-inverting amplifier using op-amp.
Compare the closed loop gain calculated from: SPICE simulation, experiment in
breadboard and theoretical computation. Convert the inverting amplifier into a volume
control circuit
7.
Design and construct summing amplifier and differencing amplifier using op-amp.
Compare the output voltages obtained from: SPICE simulation, experiment in
breadboard and theoretical computation
8.
Design differentiator, integrator, and window detector using SPICE; Design their
PCB.
9.
Design a voltage regulator circuit using 78xx/79xx series. Design PCB layout.
10.
Design a second-order low pass filter using op-amp to remove high frequency
components. Compare the cut-off frequency obtained from: SPICE simulation,
experiment in breadboard and theoretical computation. Observe the circuit output on
a speaker (tweeter) for an audio source input.
11.
Design an oscillator using op-amp to produce an audio frequency onto a speaker.
Compare the amplitude and frequency obtained from: SPICE simulation, experiment
in breadboard and theoretical computation
12.
Flash one/two LEDs whose flash rate is controlled by the time constant values of a
Multivibrator (555). Determine the flash rate (frequency) using CRO and compare it
with theoretical value. Use breadboard. Design its PCB layout.
13.
Design a DAC using op-amp which takes eight bits as input and produces 5v for logic
high and 0v for logic low. Design its PCB layout
REFERENCES
1.
Laboratory Manual, ECE Department, Kalasalingam University
2.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-002circuits-and-electronics-spring-2007/assignments/hw11.pdf
3.
http://www.sentex.ca/~mec1995/tutorial/xtor/xtor6/xtor6.html
Department of ECE
64
4.
5.
ECE285
Practical Electronics Handbook, Ian Sinclair, John Dunton, 6th Edition,

Newnes/Elsevier, 2013
Daniel M. Kaplan, Christopher G. White, Hands-On Electronics: A Practical
Introduction to Analog and Digital Circuits, Cambridge University Press, 2003
HDL PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
L
0
T
0
P
3
C
2
Prerequisite EEE101.
1. Students can design digital circuits using a hardware description language
and synthesis.
2. Students understand modern programmable logic devices and can use them
in practical applications.
3. Students understand timing and effects of hardware mapping and circuit
parasitic.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Use model electronic design automation (EDA) tools suite.
CO2
Use design abstraction and hierarchy design principles to successfully design and
develop large VLSI circuits on FPGA.
CO3
Develop an understanding of VLSI design issues.
CO4
Communicate effectively (lab records) and work as path of design team.
CO
CO1
H
M
M
H
CO2
M
M
M
CO3
M
H
H
M
H
M
CO4
L
M
M
L
H
H
Course Topic(s)
1. Study of simulation tools
2. Study of synthesis tools, Study of FPGA board
3. Simulation of simple digital circuit using Verilog HDL/VHDL
4. Simulation of 4 bit multiplier, 8 bit adder, Accumulator/Calculator (Addition, Subtraction
and Multiplication of 2s complement numbers)
5. Simulation of Multiplexer, Address decoder
6. Simulation of Clock generator
7. Simulation of Edge Triggered Data Flip Flop
8. Simulation of 2 bit counter as a FSM
9. Simulation of 4/8 bit Barrel shifter, 8 bit Parallel to serial converter (with a go bit for start
of transmission)
10. Simulation of PRBS generator, Memory unit
11. Verification of the Functionality designed in experiment 10 with test bench
12. Synthesis of the (experiment 9) design and power, timing analysis of the synthesized design
on an FPGA
Department of ECE
65
REFERENCES
1.
2.
Practical Electronics Handbook, Ian Sinclair, John Dunton, 6th Edition,
Newnes/Elsevier, 2013.
3.
Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis, Samir Palnitkar, PHI , 2009
4.
VHDL: Programming by Example, Douglas L. Perry, TMH
5.
Digital Design with RTL Design, Verilog and VHDL, Frank Vahid, 2nd Edition, Wiley
India, 2010.
6.
Digital Principles and Applications, Donald Leach, Albert Malvino, Goutam Saha, 7th
Edition, 2010, TMH
7.
Digital Design, M. Morris Mano, 5th Edition, Pearson India, 2013.
ECE301
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite ECE206, ECE210.

The basic concepts and techniques for processing signals on a computer.
Signals, systems, time and frequency domain concepts which are
associated with the mathematical tools (i.e.) fundamental to all DSP
techniques.
To provide a thorough understanding and working knowledge of design,
implementation, analysis and comparison of digital filters for processing of
discrete time signals.
To study various sampling techniques and different types of filters and will
also understand Basic principles of Estimation Theory.
The most important methods in DSP, including digital filter design,
transform-domain processing and importance of Signal Processors.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Students will be able to
Analyse and process signals in the discrete domain
CO2
Design IIR Filters to suit specific requirements for specific applications
CO3
Design FIR Filters to suit specific requirements for specific applications
CO4
Compute statistical analysis and inference on random signals
CO5
Design multi-rate signal processing algorithms to suite specific needs
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
L
M
H
CO3
L
M
H
CO4
M
M
L
CO5
H
M
L
L
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Department of ECE
66
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASIC ELEMENTS
Digital Signal Processing System advantages of digital over analog signal processing Applications of DSP, FFT algorithms Radix2 FFT algorithms decimation in time
decimation in Frequency algorithms Applications of FFT algorithms
IIR FILTERS
Design of Butterworth filters - Chebyshev Type I and Type II filters - IIR filter design using
bilinear transformation - impulse invariant transformation - frequency transformation in analog
and digital domain
FIR FILTERS
Design of Linear phase FIR filters using Rectangular, Hamming, and Kaiser Windows Design
of linear phase FIR filters using frequency sampling techniques
FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS, MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING
Number representations fixed point and floating point numbers - Quantization of fixed and
floating point numbers, coefficient of quantization - over flow error truncation error co
efficient of quantization error - limit cycle oscillation signal scaling Multirate Signal
Processing: Interpolation and Decimation, Sampling rate conversion , Spectrum of the sampled
signal, Applications
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS
Architectural features of DSP Bus Architecture DSP Computational building blocks
TMS320C54XX Processor: Features, Architecture, Interrupts, Addressing modes, Instruction set
Introduction to TMS320C6X Processor Architecture
TEXT BOOKS
1.
John G Proakis, Dimtris G Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms
and Application, Pearson, 4th Edition, 2012
2.
Udayashankara, V, Modern Digital Signal Processing: Includes Signals and Systems
Matlab Programs, DSP Architecture with Assembly and C Programs, PHI, 2nd Edition,
2012
3.
S Salivahanan, Digital Signal Processing, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2011
REFERENCES
1.
Oppenheim Alan V., Schafer Ronald W, Discrete Time Signal Processing, PHI, 2010
2.
Sanjit Mitra, Digital Signal Processing A Computer based approach, TMH, 4th Edition,
2013
3.
Dr. Shaila D. Apte, Digital Signal Processing, Wiley India, 2nd Edition, 2010
4.
B. Venkataramani, M Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2010
Department of ECE
67
L
T
P
C
MICROPROCESSORS AND
3
0
0
3
MICROCONTROLLERS
Prerequisite ECE210, CSE255
Objective(s) To familiarize the students with
To develop an in-depth understanding of the operation of microprocessors and
microcontrollers, machine language programming & interfacing techniques
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Describe the architecture, role of CPU, registers of intel microprocessors.
CO2
Write a assembly language programs by using the knowledge on instruction set
and programming of 8085 and 8086 processors.
CO3
Interface a peripheral with 8085/8086 processor.
CO4
Select a microcontroller required an application by using knowledge gained on
architecture of microcontrollers.
CO5
Develop a microcontroller based system by acquiring knowledge on programming
a microcontroller.
CO
CO1
H
H
H
CO2
L
M
M
M
L
L
M
CO3
L
L
M
L
L
CO4
H
L
L
L
CO5
L
L
H
L
H
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
8085 PROCESSOR
Microprocessors Introduction: Computer and its organisation, Programming system, Address Bus,
Data Bus and Control Bus, Tristate Bus, Clock generation, Connecting Microprocessor to I/O
Devices, Data transfer schemes, Architectural Advancements, Evolution 8085: Hardware
Architecture, Instruction set and Programming
8086 PROCESSOR
8086: Hardware Architecture, Instruction set and Programming Introduction to Architecture of:
Intels P5, Netburst, Core, Nehalem, Skylake, Bonnell, Goldmont and AMDs Bulldozer, Jaguar
PROCESSOR - PERIPHERAL INTERFACING
8085 and 8086 Peripheral Interfacing
MICROCONTROLLERS
Introduction to Computing: Numbering and coding systems review, Digital primer,
Semiconductor memory, Computer architecture Embedded systems - Introduction to
architecture of: Intel 8051, PIC 32, Cold fire 32bit, ARM Cortex A processor- Introduction to
ECE304
Department of ECE
68
Arduino - AVR Microcontroller History and Features AVR Architecture and Assembly
Language Programming, Programming in C I/O Port Programming Instructions Addressing
Modes Bit addressability AVR Fuse bits Timer, Counter programming AVR Interrupts
SPI Bus protocol SPI Programming in AVR
MICROCONTROLLER INTERFACING
ATMEGA32 connection to RS232 LCD Interfacing Keyboard Interfacing ATMEGA32
ADC features Interfacing temperature sensor to AVR DAC Interfacing AVR connection to
relay AVR connection to solid state relay DC motor interfacing DC motor control using
PWM Seven Segment Decoder interfacing
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Sarmad Naimi, Sepehr Naimi, AVR Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C, Pearson India, 2014
2.
Krishna Kant, Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, PHI, 1st Edition, 2011
3.
ATmega48A/PA/88A/PA/168A/PA/328/P Complete Datasheet, ATMEL,2012
REFERENCES
1.
Douglas Hall, S S S P Rao, Microprocessors and its Interfacing, TMH, 3rd Edition, 2012
2.
Rafiquzzaman M, Microprocessors: Theory and Applications, PHI, 2008
3.
N. Senthil Kumar, M. Saravanan, S. Jeevananthan and S. K. Shah, Microprocessors and
Interfacing, Oxford Press India, 1st Edition, 2012
4.
Dhananjay Gadre, Programming and Customizing the AVR Microcontroller, TMH, 1st
Edition, 2009
5.
Richard H. Barnett, Larry D. O'Cull, Sarah Alison Cox, Embedded C Programming and
the ATMEL AVR, Cengage International, 2010
6.
Dale Wheat, Arduino Internals, e-book (Google Books, Amazon.com) , 2011
L
T
P
C
ANALOG AND DIGITAL
3
1
0
4
COMMUNICATIONS
Prerequisite MAT104, MAT202, ECE203, MAT215, ECE206, ECE302/ ECE306, ECE383,
ECE384
Objective(s) To provide an introduction to fundamental concepts in digital communication.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Use the knowledge of basic electronic communication process for solution of
engineering problems.
CO2
Compare various analog and digital modulation, demodulation techniques and
select a necessary modulation/demodulation technique for an application.
CO3
Analyse the various error controlling techniques in both analog and digital
communications.
CO4
Design and develop a communication system with an understanding of its
limitations and impact on society.
ECE307
Department of ECE
69
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
H
L
L
M
CO3
M
M
CO4
M
H
H
M H
H L
L
L
L
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
COMMUNICATION FUNDAMENTALS
Elements of Communication System - Communication Channels and their characteristics Mathematical models for channels - Review of Fourier series, Fourier transforms Power, Energy
Sampling of Bandlimited signals Bandpass signals Random processes (Basic concepts)
Random processes in the frequency domain Gaussian and white processes Bandlimited
processes and Sampling Bandpass processes
ANALOG SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION
Introduction to Modulation Amplitude Modulation Angle Modulation Radio and TV
Broadcasting Effect of Noise on Linear Modulation systems Effect of Noise on Exponential
Modulation systems Analog Modulation Systems Comparison
DIGITAL MODULATION
Quantization Source Coding theorem Source Coding Algorithms Baseband techniques:
PAM, PWM, PPM, PCM, DM, and line coding,
DIGITAL TRANSMISSION
Passband techniques: Binary and M-ary signalling ASK, PSK, FSK, QPSK, QAM Multiplexing
techniques (FDM, TDM, and Quadrature multiplexing)
ERROR ANALYSIS
Intersymbol interference - Eye diagram - constellation diagram - gray coding - noise, and error
probabilities for Binary and M-ary communications - Error control coding
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Leon W. Couch, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Pearson India, 7th Edition,
2013
2.
Proakis John G., Salehi Masoud, Communication Systems Engineering, PHI, 2nd Edition,
2010
3.
Simon Haykins, Introduction to Analog and Digital Communications, Wiley India, 1st
Edition, 2009
4.
Proakis John G., Salehi Masoud, Fundamentals of Communication Systems, PHI, 1st
Edition, 2008
5.
Hwei Hsu, Debjani Mitra, Schaum's Outline of Analog and Digital Communications,
TMH, 3rd Edition, 2010
Department of ECE
70
6.
7.
Grahame Smillie, Analogue and Digital Communication Techniques, Newnes/Elsevier, 1st

Edition, 1999
K. Sam Shanmugam, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Wiley India, 2006
L
T
P
C
COMPUTER ORGANISATION AND
3
0
0
3
ARCHITECTURE
Prerequisite ECE210
Objective(s) 1. To learn about the Computer architecture paradigms that determines the
capabilities performance of computer systems.
2. To know about the some of the processor, instruction set and assembly language
Programming.
3. To learn about pipelining, memory and I/O systems
4. To know about the micro programming, control unit and operating systems
5. To learn about the parallel processing multiprocessing and multi core,
contemporary design issues and how to conduct a tradeoff various design
Objective(s)s
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, the students must be able to,
Explain the fundamentals of computer architecture
CO2
Interpret the instruction level parallelism and dynamic scheduling
CO3
Analyze the operation of memory and input-output.
CO4
Identify the performance issues in the multiprocessors
CO5
Explain the problems in the parallelism
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
H
M
L
L
M
L
CO3
H
M
CO4
H
M
M
L
L
CO5
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
COURSE TOPIC(S)S
OVERVIEW, ARITHMETIC OF COMPUTER
Difference between architecture and organisation Architectural features History of computers
Classification of computers Basic structure of computer hardware Basic operational concepts
Bus structure Building blocks of a computer Signed and Unsigned numbers Multiplication
and Division Floating point representation and arithmetic Pipelined ALU
PROCESSOR, INSTRUCTION SET AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING
ECE308
Department of ECE
71
Processor architecture and organisation Processor operation Register set Stack organisation
Interrupts RISC and CISC processors Intel Pentium 4: RISC like CISC design, Internal
Architecture, Register set AMD Bulldozer: Internal Architecture, Register Set ARM:
Architecture, Register set Intel Sandy Bridge: Architecture, Register set
High level, Assembly and Machine Language Functions and characteristics of instructions
Addressing modes Instruction formats and fields Assembly Language Programming,
Assembler Instruction set of: Intel Pentium 4, ARM, AMD Bulldozer, and Intel Sandy Bridge
PIPELINING, MEMORY, I/O ORGANISATION
Pipelining basics Pipelining performance Data hazards Instruction hazards Structural
hazards Control and data paths Pentium 4 Pipelining, Memory classification Memory
characteristics and Hierarchy Cache Memory Main memory: Primary memory, DRAM
(SDRAM, DDRDRAM, DDR2, DDR3, DDR4, DDR5) Read-Only Memory (EPROM,
EEPROM, Flash, Multilevel Flash, NAND Flash, NOR Flash) Secondary Memory (Hard disc,
Optical disc, Magnetic tape) Virtual memory Memory management Memory decoding
organisation ,Basic input/output structure of computers Asynchronous communication Serial
and Parallel communications - Programmed I/O Interrupt driven I/O Standard I/O interfaces
(Buses) Bus arbitration
MICROPROGRAMMING, CONTROL UNIT, OPERATING SYSTEMS
Need of data path Problem of allowing data flow Hardwired control Programmed control
Processor data path design Control unit Micro operations Control of the processor
Hardware implementation Examples
Operating system introduction Process and its control Scheduling issues Threads
Semaphores Memory management issues
PARALLEL PROCESSING, MULTIPROCESSORS, MULTICORES
Parallel processing Program parallelism Superscalar operation Difficulty of creating parallel
processing programs Shared memory multiprocessors Clusters and other message parsing
multiprocessors Hardware multithreading SISD, MIMD, SIMD, SPMD and Vector Array
processor Vector processor Multi-core processors: Homogeneous and Heterogeneous
processors, Homogenous multiprocessors (Intel Nehalm Multi-core processor, AMD Multi-core
processors, ARM Cortex9 Multi-core processor, Introduction to Graphical Processing Units)
Heterogeneous multiprocessors
TEXTBOOKS
1.
Alan Cements, Computer Organization and Architecture: Themes and Variations, Cengage
Learning, 2014
2.
Subrata Ghoshal, Computer Architecture and Organization: From 8085 to core2Duo and
beyond, Pearson India, 2011
3.
David A. Patterson, John L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The Hardware
/ Software Interface, Morgan Kaufmann/Elsevier, 4th Edition, 2012
4.
David A. Patterson, John L. Hennessy, Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach,
Morgan Kaufmann/Elsevier, 5th Edition, 2012
Department of ECE
72
L
T
P
C
0
0
3
2
LABORATORY
Prerequisite ECE206.
Implementation of Signals and Systems using MATLAB.
Implementation of IIR and FIR filter using MATLAB
Implementation of basic concepts of signals, filtering using DSP Processors
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, the students must be able to,
Analyse the signals and design systems for signal processing
CO2
Explain the DSP architecture and its instructions
CO3
CO4
CO
CO1
H
H
H
M
L
CO2
H
M
CO3
L
M
M
L
H
M
CO4
L
M
M
L
M
H
Course Topic(s)
1. Familiarisation to software and hardware of Digital Signal Processing
2. Generation of continuous time and discrete time signals. Simulate the (time) response of
continuous or discrete linear systems to arbitrary inputs
3. Linear and circular convolution of two sequences
4. Circular convolution using DFT
5. Design of IIR filters Butterworth , Chebyshev Type I and II
6. Design of FIR filters using windows
7. Calculation of FFT of a signal using DIT and DIF algorithm
8. Spectral estimation or Noise reduction technique
9. Model analog communication system (Generate sine signal, apply amplitude modulation
at transmitter, add AWGN of channel, demodulate the received signal, calculate SNR)
10. BER Analysis of binary digital modulation Schemes (ASK, PSK and FSK) in the
presence of Additive White Gaussian Noise
11. Generation of signals using DSP Processor; Implementation of IIR filter on DSP
Processor
12. Analyse Audio recording at different sampling frequencies and bit rate using windows
media player/sound recorder software in the operating system for speech and music
signals; Sampling rate conversion using different prefilters and interpolation filters
programmed using mathematical modelling software.
REFERENCES
1.
Software required for computing:
GNU Octave Open source or FreeMat Open source or SciLab Open Source or MatLab
proprietary.
ECE381
Department of ECE
73
L
T
P
C
MICROPROCESSORS AND
0
0
3
2
MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY
Familiarize the architecture of 8085, 8086 processor, assembling language
programming and interfacing with various modules.
The student can also understand of AVR Microcontroller concepts, architecture,
programming and application of Microcontrollers.
Student able to do any type of VLSI, embedded systems, industrial and real time
applications by knowing the concepts of Microprocessor and Microcontrollers
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Write Assembly Language Programs for Microprocessors and Microcontroller
CO2
Interface various devices to a microprocessor/microcontroller, including memory
CO3
Design and develop a microcontroller based systems as per the requirements.
CO
CO1
L
M
H
L
H
CO2
L
M
H
L
H
CO3
L
L
H
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Course Topic(s)
1.
Microprocessor Trainer kits: Familiarisation Hardware, Software
8085 Programs
2.
Addition of Two 8-Bit Numbers and Sum is 16 Bit; Addition of Two 16-Bit
Numbers and Sum is 16-bit
3.
Decimal Addition of Two 8-Bit Numbers and Sum is 8-bit
4.
Square root of a number
8086 Programs
5.
Multiply Two 8 Bit Numbers; Divide Two 8 Bit Numbers
6.
Arrange n Numbers in Descending Order
7.
Find Factorial of a number
Microcontroller (AVR) Programs
(Use Arduino board to load ATMEL Studio Compiled programs) [I] [II] [III] [IV] [V]
8.
Microcontroller Programming - Familiarisation
9.
Using ATMEL Studio IDE
a.
Switching ON/OFF LED with Software Button Debounce
b.
Generate Square Wave, Sawtooth Wave, Triangular Wave using PWM
c.
Use ATMEGA timer to flash LED
d.
Display temperature using temperature sensor (ADC, Interrupts, LCD
interface)
10.
Using Arduino IDE
a. Scroll a text on a 16x2 LCD screen
ECE 385
Department of ECE
74
b. Spin a DC (Toy) motor in either direction using H-bridge (Texas Instruments
L293NE or Texas Instruments SN754410). Change motor direction based on
comparing light intensity received by photo cell (LDR) with a threshold value
c. Control a servo with LED movement indication and LCD position display
d. Display temperature using TMP36 on first row of 16x2 LCD; Display Maximum,
Minimum Temperatures on second row of 16x2 LCD; Log the values in a text file
on an SD card
e. Interface an electret condenser microphone (or) Turn a pencil drawing into a
capacitive sensor
f. Interface a keypad and LCD screen to design a simple calculator
REFERENCES
1) http://www.engblaze.com/tutorial-using-atmel-studio-6-with-arduino-projects/
2) http://russemotto.com/xloader
3) http://blog.elenika.net/?p=25
4) http://www.asensar.com/howto/step-by-step-guide-to-integrating-atmel-studioavrdude/
5) http://www.asensar.com/howto/step-by-step-guide-to-setting-up-avr-studio-6-forarduino-development/
6) Laboratory Manual, ECE Department, Kalasalingam University
7) Getting Started with Arduino, Massimo Banzi, 2nd Edition, OReilly
8) Beginning C for Arduino, Jack Purdum, e-book (Google Books)
9) Arduino Cookbook, Michael Margolis, 2nd Edition, OReilly
COMPONENTS/DEVICES REQUIRED
8085 Trainer Board, 8086 Trainer Board, Arduino UNO R3/Arduino Mega2560 R3, LCD Shield
for Arduino, 16x2 LCD board (HD44780 compatible), Relay Control Board 3 Relays, Servo
motor with Horns, 12 button keypad, Temperature TMP36, Electret condenser microphone, DC
Motor, L293NE or SN754410 IC, LDR/Photo Cell, Jumper wires, Resistors, Capacitors, Arduino
Case/Enclosure, LEDs, Switches, Breadboard, PC with Atmel Studio IDE and Arduino IDE, CRO,
Multimeter, Paper Clips, Pencil/Charcoal/Carbon
L
T
P
C
COMPUTER COMMUNICATION
3
1
0
4
NETWORKS
Prerequisite ECE210
To provide an introduction to fundamental concepts in digital
communication.
To provide coverage of basic network terminology.
To describe the OSI reference model, common protocols and their
operation, IP network addressing and current industry trends.
To provide enough information about information security, abuse detection
and prevention issues in computer communication networks.
ECE306
Department of ECE
75
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply the fundamentals of data communication concepts
CO2
Explain the basic processes and functionality of each layer of the OSI model and
TCP/IP protocol suite
CO3
Understand network security techniques
CO4
Grasp the research on advanced topics in networking and summarize it in writing
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
H
M
CO3
H
M
CO4
H
M
H
M
L
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
DATA COMMUNICATION FUNDAMENTALS, PHYSICAL LAYER
Introduction Network models Introduction to Physical Layer: Data and Signals, Digital
Signals, Data Rate Limits (Shannon Capacity, Nyquist Bit rate), Performance Review of Analog
and Digital Transmission Transmission Media - Switching
DATA LINK LAYER
Introduction Error detection and correction Data Link Control Medium Access Control
Wired LANs Wireless LANs Other Wireless Networks (WiMAX, Cellular Telephony)
Connecting Devices
NETWORK LAYER
Introduction to Network Layer Network Protocols Unicast Routing Multicast Routing Ipv6
TRANSPORT LAYER, APPLICATION LAYER
Introduction to Transport Layer Transport Layer Protocols Introduction to Application Layer
Standard Client Server Protocols Peer to Peer Paradigm
QUALITY OF SERVICE, NETWORK SECURITY
Quality of Service Cryptography and Network Security Internet Security
TEXT BOOK
1.
Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking TMH, 5th Edition, 2013
REFERENCES
1.
Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, Pearson India, 5th Edition, 2012
2.
William Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, Pearson India, 8th Edition, 2013
3.
ITL Education Solutions Limited, Express Learning Data Communications and
Computer Networks, Pearson India, 1st Edition, 2012
4.
Prakash C. Gupta, Data Communication and Computer Networks, PHI, 2013
5.
Brijendra Singh, Data Communication and Computer Networks, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2014
6.
Uyless Black, Computer Networks: Protocols, Standards, and Interfaces, PHI, 2nd Edition,
2011
Department of ECE
76
ECE309
VLSI DESIGN
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE210, ECE285, ECE 286

Objective(s) To familiarise the students on design in integrated circuits using CMOS.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the characteristics of CMOS transistors and their circuit level of models.
CO2
Explain the chip technology scaling process.
CO3
Identify the interactions between process parameters device structures , circuit
performance and system design.
CO4
Create models of CMOS circuit that realize specified function as mini-project.
CO5
Describe digital system testing and verification strategies.
CO6
Survey literature on new developments in integrated circuit design and
communicate the information analysed from it through reports
CO
CO1
H
H
H
M
CO2
H
H
H
M
CO3
H
H
H
L
L
H
M
CO4
H
H
H
M
M
H
L
L
L
L
M
CO5
H
H
CO6
H
H
L
H
M
M
H
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION TO CMOS CIRCUITS
MOS transistors, CMOS Logic, VLSI design flow, Introduction Fabrication, Packaging and
Testing, Circuit and System Representations, Introduction MOS transistor theory, MOS Device
design equations Ideal I-V Characteristics, C-V Characteristics, Non-Ideal I-V effects;
Complementary CMOS inverter DC characteristics.
CMOS PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
CMOS Fabrication, Silicon semiconductor technology overview wafer formation, photo
lithography, well and channel formation, oxidation, isolation, n-tub, p-tub and twin-tub CMOS
process. gate oxide, gate and source/drain formation, contacts and metallization, passivation,
metrology; Basic CMOS technology, Stick Diagrams, Design rules and Layouts Layer
representation, n-well rules, design rule background, layer assignments.
CIRCUIT CHARACTERISATION AND PERFORMANCE ESTIMATION
Introduction, Resistance estimation, Capacitance estimation, Inductance estimation , Switching
characteristics Delay estimation-introduction, Transient response, RC delay model, Linear delay
model, CMOS gate transistor sizing, Logical effort and transistor sizing, Timing analysis delay
Department of ECE
77
models, Power Dissipation Dynamic power, Static power, Energy-delay optimization, Low power
architectures
CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN AND DESIGN METHOD
Combinational Circuit Design , Circuit Families, Circuit Pitfalls, Sequential Circuit Design,
Sequencing Static Circuits, Circuit Design of Latches and Flip-Flops, Sequencing Dynamic
Circuits, Datapath Subsystems, Addition/Subtraction, One/Zero Detectors, Comparators,
Counters, Boolean Logical Operations, Coding.
DESIGN METHODOLOGY, TESTING, DEBUGGING, AND VERIFICATION
Introduction, Structured Design Strategies, Design Methods, Design Flows, DC Specifications,
AC Specifications, CMOS Physical Design Styles, Pitfalls and Fallacies, Logic Verification,
Testers, Test Fixtures, and Test Programs, Logic Verification Principles, Silicon Debug Principles,
Manufacturing Test Principles, Design for Testability
TEXT BOOK
1.
Neil H. E. Weste, David Harris, CMOS VLSI Design, Pearson India, 4th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCES
1.
Neil H. E. Weste, Eshraghian Kamran, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design A System
Perspective, Pearson India, 2nd Edition, 2010
2.
Neil H. E. Weste, David Harris, Banerjee, CMOS VLSI Design A Circuits and System
Perspective, Pearson India, 3rd Edition, 2011
3.
Douglas A Pucknell and Eshraghian Kamran, Basic VLSI Design - System and Circuits.
PHI, 2003
4.
Wayne Wolf, Modern VLSI Design, Pearson India, 2009
5.
John .P. Uyemura, Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems , Wiley India, 2006
L
T
P
C
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND
0
0
3
2
NETWORKS LABORATORY
Prerequisite MAT202, MAT215, ECE205, ECE206, ECE302, HSS101, HSS102, ECE305,
ECE306
Objective(s) At the end of the course the student will be able
To study the communication networks characteristics and to analyze various
MAC and routing layer Protocols.
Analyze and design basic communications systems, particularly with
application to noise-free analog and digital communications.
Develop the ability to compare and contrast the strengths and weaknesses of
various communication systems
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Use various test equipments to construct and verify communications circuit
CO2
Perform laboratory experiments that illustrate communication engineering
techniques
Demonstrate understanding of numerous network protocols including stop and wait, goCO3
ECE386
back n, and selective repeat.
Department of ECE
78
CO4
Demonstrate understanding of routing algorithms including distance vector routing and

link state routing.
CO5
CO6
CO
CO1
H
H
H
H
M
M
L
CO2
H
H
H
H
M
M
L
CO3
H
H
H
H
CO4
H
H
H
H
CO5
L
M
M
L
H
M
CO6
L
M
M
L
M
H
Course Topic(s)
1. Familiarisation to Kit and Components
2. AM Transmitter and Receiver (Use IC MC1496)
3. FM Transmitter based on MC1648 VCO; FM Receiver (Demodulator) using 565
4. White Noise Generator using Zener or BJT
5. Automatic Gain Control circuit using op-amp
6. TDM Multiplexing using SL100, SK100, 741; De-multiplexing using SL100,
SK100
7. FSK (Modulator and Demodulator) using timer 555
8. PC to PC communication; Finding IP Address for the local host/given host name
and vice versa and also comparing two IP Addresses/Host names.
9. Study of Network Simulator; Creation of Wired and Wireless network using NS-2
10. Ethernet LAN protocol
11. Implementation of File Server- Client Model Using Transmission Control
Protocol/User Diagram Protocol
12. Token bus and token ring protocols
13. Implementation and study of stop and wait protocol
14. Implementation of distance vector routing algorithm
15. Implementation of link state routing algorithm
16. Implementation of data encryption and decryption
REFERENCES
1.
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
Prerequisite ECE 303, ECE302, ECE201, PHY101, PHY102, CHY105/ ECE481
1. To describe the operation and construction of different types of optical fibres.
Objective(s)
2. To use different components of an optical link appropriately.
3. To learn in detail about the different types of optical sources and receivers
4. To know the ways to avoid the degradations in optical transmission.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Define basic optical laws and fundamentals.
ECE403
FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS
Department of ECE
79
CO2
CO3
Classify the structure of optical fibres and connectors.

Describe the channel impairement like losses and dispersion analyse power
launching and coupling.
CO4
Techniques for optical fibres.
CO5
Classify the optical sources and detectors and explain their priniciples, properties.
CO6
Calculate the system bandwidth, noise, probability of error and bit rate of a digital
fibre system.
CO7
Explain different concepts and component of wave division multiplexing.
CO
CO1
H
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
M
L
M
CO4
H
H
L
M
CO5
H
M
L
CO6
H
H
L
L
H
CO7
H
H
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
FUNDAMENTALS OF FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS
Fibre optic communication systems Optics review Light wave fundamentals
OPTIC WAVEGUIDES
Integrated optic waveguides Optic fibre waveguides
SOURCES, DETECTORS
Optical sources and amplifiers Optic detectors Couplers and Connectors
FIBRE OPTIC MODULATION, NOISE
Modulation Noise and detection System design
FIBRE OPTIC NETWORKS
Distribution networks and Fibre components Basic Networks SONET / SDH WDM
Networks Wavelength Routed Networks Non linear effects on Network performance
Performance of WDM + EDFA system Solitions Optical CDMA Ultra High Capacity
Networks
TEXT BOOK
1.
Joseph C. Palais, Fibre Optic Communications, Pearson India, 5th Edition, 2012
REFERENCES
1.
Harold Kolimbiris, Fibre Optics Communications, Pearson India, 2nd Edition, 2008
2.
John M. Senior, Optical Fibre Communications: Principles and Practice, Pearson India,
3rd Edition, 2009
3.
Gerd Keiser, Optical Communication Essentials, TMH, 1st Edition, 2011
Department of ECE
80
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
S.C. Gupta, Textbook on Optical Fibre Communication and Its Applications, PHI, 2nd
Edition, 2012
Djafar K. Mynbaev, Lowell L. Scheiner, Fibre-Optics Communications Technology,
Pearson India, 1st Edition, 2009 Reprint
Max M.-K. Liu, Principles and Applications of Optical Communications, TMH, 1st
Edition, 2010
K. S. Thyagarajan, Ajoy Ghatak, Fibre Optic Essentials, Wiley India, 2007
Reinhold No, Essentials of Modern Optical Fibre Communication, Springer, 2012
ECE404
MICROWAVE DEVICES
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite ECE204, ECE201, EEE101

Objective(s) The goal of the course is to acquire the necessary knowledge of Microwave
devices, amplifiers and microwave measurements.
1. To deal about Basic Microwaves, applications and Microwave network
analysis.
2. To provide in depth understanding of Microwave passive devices.
3. To understand the concept of microwave semiconductor devices.
4. To get the knowledge about Microwave tubes and Microwave
measurements.
5. To study about microwave amplifiers and oscillator.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the principles of operation of basic microwave devices.
CO2
Use S-parameters for microwave circuit analysis.
CO3
Explain the methods used for generation and amplification of microwave power.
CO4
Distinguish between the linear and cross field electron beam microwave tubes.
CO5
Analyse the operating principles and performance of microwave semiconductor
devices.
CO6
Select suitable methodologies to characterize and verify the performance of
microwave circuits and devices.
CO7
Explain compare the various fabrication technologies and select the appropriate
technology for a particular application and justify that selection
CO8
Survey literature on new developments in microwave circuits design and analyse
the information and communicate through reports.
CO
CO1
H
L
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
M
L
L
CO4
H
L
CO5
H
H
M
M
CO6
H
L
M
L
L
CO7
H
H
L
L
L
CO8
H
H
L
H
M
M
H
M
Department of ECE
81
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
MICROWAVE PASSIVE DEVICES
Introduction-Microwave frequency band and advantages-Scattering matrix Representation of
networks- properties of S matrix- Microwave Tee junctions Hybrid Rings - Directional couplers
Isolator- Circulators- corners Attenuators-Phase shifters-Wave Guide windows- Coupling
probes and loops ,Twists, bends, Tapers and Joints S-Matrix of microwave passive components
two hole directional couplers S matrix of microwave components Matching at High
frequencies
MICROWAVE SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Introduction - Microwave semiconductor diodes- Gunn diode RWH theory-Modes of operation
of the Gunn Diode-Read Diode - IMPATT diodes TRAPATT and BARITT diode- Microwave
BJTs and FETs POINT contact diode-PIN diode-The Schottky barrier diode-Step Recovery
diode-Parametric amplifiers-The Manley-Rowe energy relations.
MICROWAVE TUBES AND MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS
Limitations of conventional Vacuum tubes- Klystron-Two cavity Klystron amplifiers-Reflex
Klystron-Principle and operation-Velocity Modulation and Bunching process-Travelling wave
tubes-Slow wave structure-Amplification process-Cylindrical Magnetron-Equations of electron
motion-Cyclotron angular frequency-Power output and efficiency. Basic Microwave block of the
bench-components-Measurement of frequency-VSWR-Attenuation-Impedance-Power-Q of the
cavity-Measurement of scattering matrix-Spectrum analyzer-Network analyzer-microwave
antenna measurements
STRIP LINES AND MMIC
Constructional features and characteristics of Strip lines and Micro strip lines-Lumped elements
in Micro strip lines -Introduction to monolithic microwave integrated circuits Characteristics of
substrate materials-Conductor Materials-Dielectric Materials-Resistance Materials-MMIC
Fabrication Techniques-Thin film fabrication-Hybrid Integrated circuit (HIC) fabricationExamples
APPLICATION OF MICROWAVES
Block diagram of Micro wave communication systems-Microwave Transmitter-Microwave
Receiver-Microwave Relay stations-Block Diagram of Microwave Radar systems-Radar
equations-Pulse Radar-Doppler radar-Radiometer System-Microwave Heating-Microwave in
Medicine-Microwave Holograms-Microwave Radiation hazards-Biological effects and safety.
TEXT BOOK
1.
Samuel Y Liao , Microwave Devices and Circuits, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2003
REFERENCES
1.
Collin, Foundations for microwave engineering, TMH, 2nd Edition 2007
2.
David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, Wiley India, 2nd Edition 2012
Department of ECE
82
L
T
P
C
0
0
3
2
PHY111,
MAT202,
ECE201,
ECE204,
ECE206,
ECE302,
ECE303,
ECE383,
Prerequisite
HSS101, HSS102/ECE 404
Objective(s) This course provides the foundational education in Microwave devices. Through
this course, students are provided learning experiences that enable them to:
1. To characterize and verify the performance of microwave devices and
circuits.
2. Undertake measurements to characterise and verify the performance of
microwave device and circuits.
3. To design a simple microwave circuit for their professional careers using
QUCS SPICE
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Use microwave measurement equipment efficiently and setup experiments
CO2
Design and simulate microwave circuits and devices
CO3
CO4
CO
CO1
L
L
H
H
CO2
L
M
H
H
L
L
CO3
L
M
M
L
H
M
CO4
L
M
M
L
M
H
Course Topic(s)
1.
Study of Microwave cables, connectors, adapters, wave-guides, components and passive
devices
2.
Frequency response of a simple transmission line circuit using CAD (QUCS SPICE)
3.
Design a 10 dB direction coupler using CAD (QUCS SPICE)
4.
Using Klystron source
a) Mode Characteristics
b) Frequency measurement
5.
Using Gunn Diode
a) V-I characteristics
b) Frequency and wavelength measurement
6.
Determination of unknown load impedance of a terminated transmission line by measuring
SWR and using Smiths Chart
7.
S-matrix characterisation of E-plane Tee, H-plane Tee, Magic Tee
8.
Attenuation and power measurement
9.
Directional Coupler parameters measurement
10.
Isolator and Circulator parameters measurement
11.
Gain measurement and Radiation pattern for a given Antenna using Waveguide
REFERENCES
1.
ECE483
MICROWAVE DEVICES LABORATORY
Department of ECE
83
L
T
P
C
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
0
0
3
2
LABORATORY
Prerequisite PHY111, MAT202, ECE201, ECE204, ECE206, ECE302, ECE303, ECE383,
HSS101, HSS102/ECE PHY111403
Objective(s) This course provides the foundational education in optical communication system.
Through this course, students are provided learning experiences that enable them
to:
1. Send the analog and digital signals through OFC and to determine
Bandwidth and bit rate.
2. Measure the attenuation and bending loss of the fibre.
3. Select the single mode or multimode fibre according to their
application.
4. Analyse the characteristics of LED, Laser, Pin photo detectors.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Design and conduct experiment to measure performance and characteristics of
devices and circuits by selecting appropriate tools and equipments
CO2
CO3
CO
CO1
H
H
H
H
H
L
M
CO2
L
M
M
L
H
M
CO3
L
M
M
L
M
H
Course Topic(s)
1. Familiarisation of optical communication system
2. DC characteristics of LED and PIN Photo diode
3. Mode characteristics of fibre
4. Measurement of connector and bending losses
5. Data transmission using fibre optic link
6. Analog Modulation transmission using optic fibre
7. Numeric aperture determination of optic fibre
8. Attenuation measurement in fibre
9. System bandwidth determination by intensity modulation
10. Time division multiplexing
11. PI characteristics of LASER
12. Study of Opto-couplers
REFERENCES
1.
ECE484
Department of ECE
84
ECE316
ANTENNA AND WAVE PROPAGATION
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite ECE209, ECE307

To study various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas.
To learn the basic working of antennas
To understand various techniques involved in various antenna parameter
Measurements.
To understand the propagation of radio waves in the atmosphere
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply the properties and parameters of antenna such as radiation pattern, radiation
impedance, directivity gain, friss equation in simple communication skills.
CO2
Explain how dipole antenna radiates and capture radio wave energy from the
concepts of radiation by dynamic charges and currents and retarded potentials.
CO3
Discover pattern multiplication principles for energy antennas and determine the
directions of maximum signal radiation and results in radiation patterns,
CO4
Design various antenna systems including the shape of antenna feed property, the
requirement on the arrangement of the radiative elements in an array given the
radiation parameter.
CO5
Describe the mechanism of atmosphere effects on the radiowave propagation.
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
M
CO3
H
M
CO4
H
H
H
M
M
CO5
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS
Basic antenna parameters patterns , beam area, radiation intensity, beam efficiency, directivity,
gain, resolution, antenna aperture, effective height friis transmission formula fields from
oscillating dipole, antenna filed zone pointing vector, polarization.
RADIATION FIELDS OF ANTENNA
Short electric dipole fields of a short dipole radiation resistance of short electric dipole thin
linear antenna radiation resistance of /2 antennas fields of a thin linear antenna with a uniform
travelling wave
ARRAY OF POINT SOURCES
Department of ECE
85
Array of two isotropic point sources non isotropic but similar point sources principles of
pattern multiplication pattern synthesis by pattern multiplication non isotropic and dissimilar
point sources linear array of n- isotropic point sources of equal amplitude and spacing null
direction for arrays of n-isotropic point sources of equal amplitude and spacing.
ANTENNAS
Loop antenna far field pattern of circular loop antennas with uniform current, radiation resistance
and directivity of loop antenna helical antenna, modes of helical antenna horn antenna patch
(or) Microstrip antenna Yagi Uda antenna frequency independent antenna lens antenna
turnstile antenna circularly polarized antenna.
PROPAGATION
Modes of propagation sky wave propagation, propagation of radio wave through ionosphere,
critical frequency, effects of earths magnetic field on ionosphere radio wave propagation, effects
of dielectric constant (kr) and conductivity() of the ionosphere, collision frequency, virtual
height, Maximum usable frequency, calculation of MUF, Skip distance, Ionospheric abnormalities
space wave propagation, range of space wave propagation effective earths radius effect of
earths curvature on troposphere propagation field strength of space or tropospheric wave duct
propagation.
TEXT BOOKS
1.
John D.Kraus, Ronalad J Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan, Antennas for all applications, TMH,
4th Edition, 2010
2.
E.C. Jordan, K. G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, PHI, 2 nd
Edition, 2007
REFERENCES
1. Prasad K. D., Antennas and wave propagation, Satya Prakashan, 3rd Edition, 2012
2. Constantine A. Ballanis, Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design, Wiley India, 3 rd Edition,
2012
L
T
P
C
MEASUREMENTS AND
INSTRUMENTATION
3
1
0
4
Prerequisite PHY 112, EEE 101,ECE 202 ,ECE 209,ECE 210,ECE211
Objective(s) To make students
Understand the basics of measurements
Know the concepts of Electronic measurements
Understand the working of signal generators and analyzers and their
application to digital measurements
know the principle of operation and use of digital instruments
learn the development of data acquisition systems and fibre optic
measurement systems
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, the students will be able to recognize the data limits on
imposed by measurement and analyse uncertainty in appropriate manner in
engineering problems
CO2
Understand the operating principles of a range of widely used measuring
instruments and hoe to use them in the design of engineering systems
ECE317
Department of ECE
86
CO3
Understand the operating principles of a range of signal generations and analysis

and use them in engineering system design
CO4
Design a digital data acquisition systems.
CO
CO1
H
H
L
CO2
H
H
L
L
L
CO3
H
H
L
L
L
CO4
H
M
L
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASIC MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS
Measurement systems Static and dynamic characteristics units and standards of measurements
error - accuracy and precision, types, statistical analysis moving coil, moving iron meters
multimeters Bridge measurements Maxwell, Hay, Schering, Anderson and Wien bridge.
BASIC ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS
Electronic multimeters Cathode ray oscilloscopes block schematic applications special
oscilloscopes delayed time base oscilloscopes, analog and digital storage oscilloscope, sampling
oscilloscope Q meters Vector meters RF voltage and power measurements True RMS
meters.
SIGNAL GENERATORS AND ANALYZERS
Function generators pulse and square wave generators, RF signal generators Sweep generators
Frequency synthesizer wave analyzer Harmonic distortion analyzer spectrum analyzer digital spectrum analyzer, Vector Network Analyzer Digital L, C, R measurements - Digital
RLC meters.
DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS
Comparison of analog and digital techniques digital voltmeter multimeters frequency
counters measurement of frequency and time interval extension of frequency range
Automation in digital instruments, Automatic polarity indication, automatic ranging, automatic
zeroing, fully automatic digital instruments, Computer controlled test systems, Virtual
instruments.
DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS AND FIBRE OPTIC MEASUREMENT
Elements of a digital data acquisition system interfacing of transducers multiplexing data
loggers computer controlled instrumentation IEEE 488 bus fibre optic measurements for
power and system loss optical time domains reflectometer
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Albert D. Helfrick and William D. Cooper Modern Electronic Instrumentation and
Measurement Techniques, PHI, 2009
2.
Ernest O. Doebelin, Measurement Systems- Application and Design, TMH, 2007
Department of ECE
87
REFERENCES
1.
Joseph J. Carr, Elements of Electronics Instrumentation and Measurement, Pearson
Education, 2003
2.
Alan. S. Morris, Principles of Measurements and Instrumentation, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2003
3.
David A. Bell, Electronic Instrumentation and measurements, PHI, 2006
4.
B.C. Nakra and K.K. Choudhry, Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis, 2nd Edition,
TMH, 2004
James W. Dally, William F. Riley, Kenneth G. McConnell, Instrumentation for
Engineering Measurements, 2nd Edition, Wiley India, 2010
ECE318
INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite ECE307
Objective(s)
To expose to students some concepts in information theory, and the
performance characteristics of an ideal communications system.
To expose to students fundamentals in coding and its applications.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain basic information and channel capacity.
CO2
Explain and analyse source coding compression, decoding and error control
methods as applied in communication system.
CO
CO1
H
H
H
H
CO2
H
H
L
L
H
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASICS OF INFORMATION THEORY
Measure of Information, Entropy of symbols, Continuous and Discrete Messages, Basic
relationship among different entropy
MUTUAL INFORMATION AND CODING THEOREM
Entropy for discrete ensembles properties of entropy of a binary memory less source extension
of a binary memory less source source coding theorem Shannon fanon coding - Huffman
coding
SHANNONS AND CHANNEL CODING THEOREM
Binary symmetric channel Markov Sources, Shannon noisy and noiseless coding theorem
properties channel capacity Hartley, Shannon Law channel coding theorem - Lempel-Ziv
coding
LINEAR AND CYCLIC CODES
Department of ECE
88
Linear block codes generator matrices parity check matrices encoder syndrome and error
correction minimum distance error correction and error detection capabilities cyclic codes
coding and decoding
OTHER CODING TECHNIQUES
Convolution codes encoder generator matrix state diagram distance properties - maximum
likelihood decoding viterbi decoding sequential decoding Hadamard matrices and Hadamard
codes BCH codes description, decoding Reed Solomon codes
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Norman Abramson, Information Theory, Wiley India, 2002.
2.
Shu Lin, Costello D. J., Error Control Coding - Fundamentals and Applications, PHI, 2004
REFERENCES
1.
Simon Haykin, Digital Communications, Wiley India, 1stdition, 2013
2.
Taub and Schilling, Principles of Communication System, TMH, 2010
3.
Tomasi, Electronic Communication, Fundamentals Through Advanced, Pearson
Education, 2004
4.
Sklar, Digital Communication, Pearson Education, 2009
5.
Cover T., and Thomas, Elements of Information Theory, Wiley India, 2012
L
T
P
C
3
1
0
4
Prerequisite EEE101, MAT202, ECE201, ECE205, ECE206, ECE302
Objective(s) At the end of the course the student will be able to know the different types of
satellites in space along with their working principles, expenditures for
communication and applications.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, the students will be able to describe the basic theories and
principles in satellite communication systems..
CO2
Create link budget for an uplink and downlink carrier to noise rate at an earth
terminal receiver.
CO3
Analyse modulation and coding scheme in satellite communication systems using
knowledge on principles and techniques.
CO4
Explain the concepts of satellite networking which includes mobile satellite
systems for voice and data communication and other applications.
CO
CO1
H
L
CO2
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
CO3
H
H
L
L
L
CO4
H
H
H
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
ECE320
Department of ECE
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
89
Course Topic(s)
ORBITAL MECHANICS AND LAUNCHERS, SATELLITE SUBSYSTEMS
History of satellite communications overview of satellite communications Indias activities in
satellite communications General structure of satellite communication Active and Passive
satellites Importance of 6/4 GHz system Satellite frequency allocation and band spectrum
Satellite applications Satellite orbits Performance characteristics of different altitude satellites
Orbital mechanics Look angle determination Orbital perturbations Orbit determination
Launchers and launch vehicles Orbital effects in communication system performance Satellite
subsystem Attitude and Orbit Control System Telemetry, Tracking, Command and Monitoring
Power systems Communication subsystems Satellite antennas Equipment Reliability and
Space Qualification
SATELLITE LINK DESIGN
Basic transmission theory System noise temperature and G/T Ratio Design of downlink
Satellite system using small earth stations Uplink design Design for specified C/N System
design examples
COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES, PROPAGATION EFFECTS
Overview of FM Analog FM transmission by satellite Digital transmission Digital
modulation and demodulation Digital transmission of analog signals Time division
multiplexing FDMA TDMA Onboard processing DAMA Random Access Packet
Radio systems and Protocols CDMA Overview of FDM/FM/FDMA analog telephone
transmission Overview of error detection and correction Implementation of error detection on
satellite links Introduction to propagation effects Quantifying attenuation and depolarisation
Propagation effects that are not associated with hydrometeors Rain and ice effects
NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GPS), DIRECT-TO-HOME SYSTEMS
Frequency spectrum for satellite communications overview Satellite applications overview
Radio and satellite navigation GPS position location principles GPS receivers and codes
Satellite signal acquisition GPS navigation message GPS signal levels Timing accuracy
GPS receiver operation GPS C/A code accuracy Differential GPS C-Band and Ku-Band
Home satellite TV Digital DBS TV DBS-TV system design DBS-TV link budget Error
control in Digital DBS-TV Master control station and uplink Installation of DBS-TV antennas
Satellite Radio Broadcasting
NON-GEOSTATIONARY SATELLITE SYSTEMS, VSAT SYSTEMS
Orbit considerations for non-geo satellites Coverage and frequency considerations Delay and
throughput considerations System considerations Operational NGSO constellation designs
Overview of VSAT systems Network architectures Access control protocols Basic
techniques Access control protocols Basic techniques VSAT Earth station engineering
Calculation of link margins System design procedure
TEXT BOOK
1. Timothy Pratt, Charles Bostian, Jeremy Allnutt, Satellite Communications, Wiley India,
2nd Edition, 2009
Department of ECE
90
ECE322
EMBEDDED AND REAL TIME SYSTEMS
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite ECE304, ECE385, ECE301, ECE381

Objective(s) The primary Objective(s)s of this course are to study the principles and concepts
of real-time embedded computing and to provide students hands-on experience in
developing distributed embedded applications. This course covers the concepts
and theory necessary to understand and program distributed embedded real-time
systems. This includes:
1. Programming, operating systems, and middleware for embedded systems
2. Concepts and theory for real-time systems,
Concepts, technologies, and protocols for distributed embedded real-time systems
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Describe the differences between the general computing system and embedded
system.
CO2
Design and build an small embedded system as mini project by applying the
knowledge on hardware interfacing software programming techniques which
includes the concepts of RTOs
CO
CO1
H
H
M
L
L
CO2
H
H
H
M
M
L
H
L
L
L
L
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
EMBEDDED SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Differences between the Desktop PC and typical Embedded System - Applications of Embedded
System - Embedded Design Life Cycle: Product Specification, Hardware/Software Partitioning,
Iteration and Implementation, Detailed Hardware and Software Design, Hardware Software
Integration, Product Testing and Release, Maintenance and Upgrading Existing products
HARDWARE INTERFACING TECHNIQUES
Microprocessor vs. Microcontroller Analysis Hardware Initialization Display and Keyboard
Interfacing - ADC, DAC and Sensor Interfacing, Serial Communication Interface: RS232, RS485,
IIC and USB. Real-time clock (RTC) and EEPROM Interface - Relay Interfacing, Stepper Motor
and DC Motor Interfacing
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT TOOLS AND PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES
Cross-Compilers, Cross-Assemblers, Linker/Locator, Debugger and Simulator - Introduction to
Integrated Development Environment (IDE) - Simple Programs using IDE: I/O Port
Programming, Timer Programming, Serial Port Programming, Interrupts Programming - Getting
Embedded Software into Target System: Up-loaders, ROM Emulators, and In-Circuit Emulators.
Debug Kernels: BDM, JTAG and Nexus
Department of ECE
91
REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS (RTOS)
Tasks and Task States, Tasks and Data, Semaphores and Shared Data, Message Queues,
Mailboxes and Pipes, Timer functions, Events, Memory Management, Interrupt Routines in RTOS
Environment - MicroC/OS-II: Need of a well tested and debugged RTOS - Use of MicroC/OS-II,
RTOS System level functions, Task Service, Time delay, Memory allocation, Semaphore,
Mailbox and Queue related functions. Other RTOS: VxWorks, Windows CE, RT Linux - Boot
loaders
CASE STUDIES
Vending machine Digital camera Smart card reader Mobile phone software for key inputs
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Jonathan W. Valvano, Embedded Microcomputer Systems: Real Time Interfacing,
Cengage Learning, 3rd Edition, 2012
2.
K V Shibu, Introduction to Embedded Systems, TMH, 2009
3.
Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/Software
Introduction, Wiley India, 3rd Edition, 2009
4.
Raj Kamal, Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming and Design, TMH, 2nd
Edition, 2008
5.
Arnold S. Berger, Embedded Systems Design: An introduction to Processes, Tools and
Techniques, CMP Books/Eswar Press (Chennai), 2005
REFERENCES
1.
David E. Simon, Embedded Software Primer, Pearson India, 2009
2.
Douglas V. Hall, Microprocessors and Interfacing, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2006
3.
Wayne Wolf, Computers as Components, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers/Elsevier, 2nd
Edition, 2008
4.
Tammy Noergaard, Embedded Systems Architecture: A Comprehensive Guide for
Engineers and Programmers, Newnes/Elsevier, 2nd Edition, 2013
5.
Steve Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Newnes/Elsevier, 2nd Edition, 2003
ECE323
ANALOG MIXED SIGNAL DESIGN
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4
Prerequisite ECE210, ECE285, ECE309

Objective(s) The Objective(s) of this course is to provide an understanding of, and experience
with, the basic design concepts for low power analog and mixed signal VLSI
circuits in CMOS technology
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the basic design concepts for low power mixed signal VLSI circuits in
CMOS technology.
CO2
Apply the knowledge in low-power analog and mixed-signal VLSI circuit analysis
and simulation.
CO3
Identify the critical parameters that affect the analog and mixed-signal VLSI
circuits performance.
CO4
Design low-power analog and mixed-signal VLSI circuits by using CMOS
processes
Department of ECE
92
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
M
L
L
CO3
H
M
L
CO4
H
M
M
M
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS
Challenges in Analog design, Mixed signal processing blocks, Mixed signal issues, Mixed signal
design example, Review of Basic MOS Transistors, Review of Basic Analog Circuits Large
signal, Small signal models, Amplifiers, Signals, Filters, Submicron CMOS circuit design
ANALOG AND DIGITAL FILTERS
Sampling, Sample and Hold Circuits, Data converters, Differential non-linearity and Integral nonlinearity for DACs and ADCs, Data converter architectures, Analog filters, Integrator building
blocks, Analog Filtering topologies, Digital filters, SPICE models for DACs and ADCs, Sincshaped Digital filters, Digital filtering topologies
DATA CONVERTER SNR, DESIGN BASICS
Quantization noise, SNR, Clock jitter, Improving SNR using averaging, using feedback,
Decimating filters for ADC, Interpolating filters for DAC, Data converter design, One bit ADC
and DAC, Passive noise-shaping, Improving SNR and linearity using an Active circuit
NOISE SHAPING, BANDPASS DATA CONVERTERS
First order noise shaping, second order noise shaping, Noise shaping topologies, Continuous time
Bandpass noise-shaping, Passive component modulators, Active component modulators,
Modulators at RF Frequencies, Switched-capacitor, Bandpass noise-shaping
HIGH SPEED DATA CONVERTERS
Topology, Clock signals, Path settling time, Implementation, filtering, understanding the signals,
Practical implementation, Generating clock signals, Components Switched capacitors,
Amplifiers, Clocked comparators; High speed ADC, Switched capacitor circuits
TEXT BOOKS
1.
R. Jacob Baker, CMOS Mixed-Signal Circuit Design, 2nd Edition, Wiley India, 2008
2.
Vineeta P. Gijji, Analog and Mixed Mode VLSI Design, PHI, 2011
3.
Erik Brunvand, Digital VLSI Chip Design with Cadence and Synopsys CAD Tools,
Pearson India, 2010
Department of ECE
93
L
T
P
C
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
AND COMPATIBILITY
3
1
0
4
ECE209
Prerequisite
Objective(s)
To explore the concepts of EMI Environment and EMI Coupling
Principles.
To focus on popular EMI/EMC Standards and Measurements
To study the control techniques involved Electromagnetic Interference.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Identify the sources of EMI and classify EMI/EMC
CO2
Explain about using requirements and tools to find or fix EMI/EMC problems
CO3
Explain the real world EMC standards and regulations
CO4
Analyse the methods to control and fix EMI
CO5
Analyse cabling and grounding problems in high frequency systems
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
L
M
L
CO3
H
L
L
H
L
CO4
H
L
CO5
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASIC CONCEPTS
Definition of EMI and EMC with examples, Classification of EMI/EMC - CE, RE, CS, RS, Units
of Parameters, Sources of EMI, EMI coupling modes - CM and DM, ESD Phenomena and effects,
Transient phenomena and suppression
EMI MEASUREMENTS
Basic principles of RE, CE, RS and CS measurements, EMI measuring instruments- Antennas,
LISN, Feed through capacitor, current probe, EMC analyser and detection technique open area
site, shielded anechoic chamber, TEM cell
EMC STANDARD AND REGULATIONS
National and Intentional standardizing organizations- FCC, CISPR, ANSI, DOD, IEC, CENEEC,
FCC CE and RE standards, CISPR, CE and RE Standards, IEC/EN, CS standards, Frequency
assignment - spectrum conversation
EMI CONTROL METHODS AND FIXES
Shielding, Grounding, Bonding, Filtering, EMI gasket, Isolation transformer, Opto isolator
EMC DESIGN AND INTERCONNECTION TECHNIQUES
ECE324
Department of ECE
94
Cable routing and connection, Component selection and mounting, PCB design- Trace routing,
Impedance control, decoupling, Zoning and grounding
TEXT BOOK
1.
Prasad Kodali. V, Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility, S. Chand and Company,
2001, 2nd edition
2.
Clayton R. Paul, Introduction to Electromagnetic compatibility, Wiley India, 2006
REFERENCES
1.
Keiser, Principles of Electromagnetic Compatibility, Artech House, 3rd Edition, 1994
2.
Donwhite Consultant Incorporate, Handbook of EMI / EMC Volume I, 1985
ECE325
ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION
L
3
T
1
P
0
C
4

Objective(s) The Objective(s) of this course is to get an introduction and survey of artificial
intelligence methods for robots. It covers both the theory and the practice of
unmanned systems, focusing on biological and cognitive principles that are often
quite different from control theory formulations.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the concepts of state of the art in robotics, automation, and the component
technologies
CO2
Comprehend the concepts of designing the robots
CO3
Select the tools and procedures in designing the robots
CO4
Describe the history and application of technology and engineering as it applies
to robotics and automated systems
CO
CO1
H
H
M
CO2
H
H
M
L
L
L
CO3
H
H
M
M
M
CO4
H
H
M
M
M
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
AUTOMATION AND ROBOTICS
Automation and Robotics - Robotics in Science Fiction - A Brief History of Robotics - The Robot
and Its Peripherals-Robot Activation and Feedback Components - Position Sensors - Velocity
Sensors - Actuators - Power Transmissions Systems - Robot Joint Control Design- Introduction
to Manipulator Kinematics - Homogeneous Transformations and Robot Kinematics - Manipulator
Path Control - Robot Dynamics - Configuration of a Robot Controller.
Department of ECE
95
ROBOTIC DESIGN
Types of End Effectors - Mechanical Grippers - Other Types of Grippers - Tools as End Effectors
-The Robot/End Effectors Interface - Considerations in Gripper Selection and Design - Sensors
in Robotics - Tactile Sensors - Proximity and Range Sensors - Miscellaneous Sensors and SensorBased Systems - Uses of Sensors in Robotics - Introduction to Machine Vision - The Sensing and
Digitizing Function in Machine Vision - Image Processing and Analysis - Training and Vision
System - Robotic Applications.
ROBOT PROGRAMMING
Methods of Robot Programming Lead through Programming Methods - A Robot Program as a
Path in Space - Motion Interpolation - WAIT, SIGNAL, and DELAY Commands - Branching capabilities and Limitations of Lead through Methods
ROBOT LANGUAGES
The Textual Robot Languages - Generations of Robot Programming Languages - Robot Language
Structure - Constants, Variables, and Other Data Objects - Motion Commands - End Effectors and
Sensor Commands - Computations and operations - Program Control and Subroutines Communications and Data Processing - Monitor Mode Commands.
ROBOT INTELLIGENCE
Introduction to robot intelligence and task planning- state space search-problem reduction-use of
predicate logic-means end analysis-problem-solving robot learning-robot task planning- expert
systems and knowledge learning
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N. Nagel, Nicholas G. Odrey, Industrial
robotics, Technology, Programming and Applications, TMH, 2012
2.
K. S. Fu, R. C. Gonzalez, C. S. G. Lee, Robotics, Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence,
TMH, 2008
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite PHY 102, EEE101, ECE201, ECE205, ECE206, ECE281, ECE302, ECE305,
ECE383
Objective(s) At the end of the course the student will be able to learn and understand the
working of real life video system and the different elements of video system plus
the encoding/decoding techniques. The learners will be groomed up to understand
different channel allocations, difference between various systems present in this
world, their transmission and reception techniques. Students will get insight on
functioning of individual blocks, different standards of compression and they will
be acquainted with different types of analog and digital systems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Describe the various components of video systems, their functions and typical
requirements.
CO2
Describe different types of television systems and displays
CO3
Explain about television transmission and reception
ECE341
Department of ECE
TELEVISION ENGINEERING
96
CO
CO1
H
H
L
L
CO2
H
H
H
H
CO3
H
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
TELEVISION BASICS
Basic Helmholtz theory Basic Television broadcasting system Practical video transmission
system Image continuity Synchronisation and scanning Synchronising pulses Kell factor
Blanking pulse Aspect ratio Video bandwidth Composite video signal Video modulation
VSB for video inter-carrier sound modulation Broadcasting channels Camera tubes
Characteristics of camera tubes - Camera tube types: Iconscope, Image orthicon, Vidicon,
Plumbicon, Saticon, Newicon, Chalnicon, Silicon diode array Vidicon Characteristics of camera
tubes CCD cameras Digital Imaging technology Active pixel sensors CCD vs. CMOS
Monochrome Picture tube Monochrome TV specifications CCIR B standards
TELEVISION TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION
TV transmitter principles TV signal propagation Interference in TV signals TV transmission
antenna Monochrome TV receiver RF tuner VHF tuner UHF Tuner Digital tuning
principles Automatic frequency tuning IF Sub system Noise cancellation Vision and sound
carrier detection - Cable Television: Cable signal sources, cable signal processing, Satellite
signals, cable signal distribution, Bi-directional cable system, scrambling and descrambling
DTH CAS CATV CCTV GYRO stabilised camera concept Digital equipments for TV
studios - TV sound: mono, stereo and NICAM
COLOUR TELEVISION AND DISPLAYS
Compatibility Colour perception Three colour theory Luminance, Hue and saturation
Colour TV Antenna Value of Luminance Colour Difference signals Colour TV Display tubes
Single colour tube camera Colour picture Purity Colour convergence Colour signal
transmission Bandwidth modulation of colour difference signal Weighting factor Formation
of chrominance signal Display devices: Matrix displays, display technologies basics and size
LCD Displays DLD displays LCOS Display PLASMA display Slim CRT EL Displays
OLED Displays - Comparison of different display devices GRASSMANs Law Colour
temperature and its applications
COLOUR TELEVISION SYSTEMS
Colour television systems NTSC Colour TV system PAL-D Colour TV system Colour Burst
separation Burst phase discriminator ACC Amplifier Reference oscillator Identification
and colour killer circuits Separation of U and V signals Colour signal matrix SECAM system
Broadcast standards (PAL/NTSC/SECAM) CCIR designations for PAL, NTSC, SECAM
Typical colour TV receiver with IC Typical PAL colour TV receiver Typical NTSC colour
Department of ECE
97
TV receiver Typical SECAM colour TV receiver Typical PAL colour TV transmitter Remote
control system Specifications of Monochrome and colour TVs
DIGITAL TELEVISIONS, INTERFACES
Analog and DTV classification - Digital TV and advantages Composite digital TV signal
transmission and reception Audio compression Video compression Image compression
DTV classification according to resolution Digital TV receiver - HDTV 1125, 1250 HDTV
standards Raster scan principles HDTV transmission types HD-MAC transmitter and
receiver Component encoded HDTV transmitter and receiver Projection TVs - EDTV - Audio
connections and interfaces Video connections and interfaces Composite video, S-video, DVI,
HDMI, UDI interfaces 3D stereoscopic TV
TEXT BOOK
1.
R. C. Jaiswal, Audio and Video Engineering, Nirali Prakashan, 2009
2.
A. Veera Lakshmi, R Srivel, Television and Video Engineering, Ane Publishers, 2010
REFERENCES
1.
K. F. Ibrahim, Newnes guide to Television and Video Technology, Newnes, 2007
L
T
P
C
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL
PROCESSING
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite MAT 101, MAT 102, MAT 205, ECE206, ECE305, ECE431, ECE429, ECE432,
ECE433, ECE301
Objective(s) The goals of this course are to give a graduate-level overview of diverse statistical
digital signal processing theory and applications which include:
Design optimum filtering algorithms and apply them to various signals
Modelling of spectrum analysis using nonparametric as well as parametric
approaches
Introduce spectrum estimation for nonparametric methods: power spectral
density, autocorrelation and transfer functions
Apply estimation techniques to digital signals such as signal separation,
detection, estimation and imaging
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Analyse and estimate discrete random signals
CO2
Design filter for stationary process
CO3
Design filters using optimization techniques
CO
CO1
H
H
M
CO2
H
H
M
L
L
L
CO3
H
H
M
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
ECE342
Department of ECE
98
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
DISCRETE RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSING
Discrete Random Processes Ensemble averages, stationary processes, Autocorrelation and Auto
covariance matrices Parseval's Theorem Wiener-Khintchine Relation power spectral density
Periodogram Spectral Factorization filtering random processes Low Pass Filtering of White
Noise parameter estimation bias and consistency.
NON-PARAMETRIC SPECTRUM ESTIMATION
Estimation of spectra from finite duration signals non-parametric methods correlation method,
periodogram estimator, performance analysis of estimators -unbiased, consistent estimators
modified periodogram Bartlett and Welch methods Blackman Tukey method Performance
comparisons
PARAMETRIC SPECTRUM ESTIMATION
Parametric Methods - AR, MA, and ARMA stochastic models and spectrum estimation.
Parameter Estimation -Yule-Walker equations, solutions using Durbins algorithm.
LINEAR ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION
Linear prediction forward and backward predictions Solutions of the Normal equations
Levinson-Durbin algorithms least mean squared error criterion Wiener filtering FIR Wiener
filter and IIR Wiener filters - filtering and prediction, Discrete Kalman filter.
ADAPTIVE FILTERS
FIR adaptive filters adaptive filter based on steepest descent method Wiener-Hoff LMS
adaptive algorithm, Normalized LMS channel equalization noise cancellation Adaptive
recursive filters (IIR) RLS adaptive filters Exponentially weighted RLS, sliding window RLS.
TEXT BOOK
1. Monson H.Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modelling, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., Singapore, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G..Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Pearson Education,
2012.
2. John G. Proakis, Algorithms for Statistical Signal Processing, Pearson Education, 2002.
3. Dimitris G. Manolakis, Statistical and adaptive signal Processing, McGraw Hill, Newyork,
2005.
4. Emmanuel C.Ifeachor, Barrie W.Jervis, Digital Signal Processing A Practical Approach,
Addison Wesley, 2002.
5. A.V. Oppenheim , Schafer, Discrete Time Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 1989.
ECE343
ADVANCED DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) The Objective(s) of the course is to explain how digital circuit of large complexity
can be built in a methodological way, starting from Boolean logic and applying a
set of rigorous techniques. Numerous examples and case studies will be used to
illustrate how the concepts presented in the lectures are applied in practice, and
Department of ECE
99
how the need to accommodate different practically-motivated trade-offs can lead
to alternative implementations.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Solve basic binary math operations using the logic gates.
CO2
Demonstrate programming proficiency using the various logical elements to
design practically motivated logical units.
CO3
Design different units that are elements of typical computers CPU.
CO4
Apply knowledge of the logic design course to solve problems of designing of
control units of different input/output devices.
CO5
Analyse different logical elements, to analyse and demonstrate timing diagrams of
the units modelled.
CO
CO1
H
H
L
L
CO2
H
M
M
L
L
L
L
M
CO3
H
M
L
L
L
L
CO4
H
L
L
CO5
H
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
COMBINATIONAL LOGIC
Digital abstraction Digital system design practice Boolean algebra review CMOS logic
circuits Combinational logic Combinational building blocks Combinational examples
ARITHMETIC CIRCUITS
Arithmetic circuits Fixed and floating point numbers Fast arithmetic circuits Arithmetic
examples
SEQUENTIAL LOGIC
Sequential logic Timing constraints Datapath sequential logic Factoring FSMs
Asynchronous sequential circuits Flip-flops Metastability and synchronisation failure
Synchroniser design
PRACTICAL SYSTEMS AND DESIGN
Verification and test Fault diagnosis and Design for testability - System-level design process
Interface and system-level timing Pipelines Memory systems High performance memories:
SDRAM, DDR SDRAM, SSRAM, DDR and QDR SRAM
ADVANCED DIGITAL SYSTEMS
Microprocessor concepts: RISC and CISC, Caches in practice, Virtual memory and MMU,
Superpipelined and superscalar architecture Serial communications Interchip serial
communications Design guidelines for EMC performance
Department of ECE
100
TEXT BOOKS
1.
William James Dally, R. Curtis, Digital design: A systems approach, Cambridge
University Press, 2012
2.
Mark Balch, Complete Digital Design, TMH, 2005
3.
Mohit Arora, The Art of Hardware Architecture: Design Methods and Techniques for
Digital Circuits, Springer, 2012
L
T
P
C
MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION
TECHNIQUES
3
0
0
3
ECE307,
ECE318,
ECE429,
ECE433
Prerequisite
Objective(s) The Objective(s) of the course is
To explain the need for Multimedia compression technique and the
different types of quantization
To study the basics audio compression technique and the Vocoders
To study the different image compression techniques and JPEG standards.
To study the different video compression techniques and MPEG standards
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Define compression and explain compression as an example of representation
CO2
Explain the idea of lossy and lossless compression
CO3
Classify the most commonly used common compressed file formats for image,
sound and video with an understanding of their limitations
CO4
Analyse and design compression algorithms
CO
CO1
H
CO2
H
H
L
CO3
H
L
L
H
L
CO4
H
L
L
L
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
OVERVIEW
Review of probability and random processes, matrices - overview of information theory
redundancy need for compression evolution of data compression - applications Taxonomy of
compression techniques overview of source coding, source models coding uniquely
decodable codes prefix codes- Kraft McMillan Inequality-Rate distortion theory
DATA COMPRESSION / TEXT COMPRESSION
Scalar quantization theory overview, uniform, adaptive, non-uniform, Entropy coded
Quantization Text Compression Compaction techniques Huffmann coding Adaptive
Huffmann Coding Arithmetic coding Shannon - Fano coding dictionary techniques LZW
family algorithms
ECE344
Department of ECE
101
AUDIO COMPRESSION
Vector quantization theory overview, LBG algorithm Tree structured vector, structured vector
quantizers rate distribution theory Evaluation techniques error analysis and methodologies Audio signal representation compression techniques Frequency domain and filtering Basic
sub-band coding G.722 MPEG audio progressive encoding for audio Silence compression
speech compression techniques Vocoders
IMAGE COMPRESSION
Predictive techniques DM, PCM, DPCM optimal predictors and optimal quantization
contour based compression, Quad trees transform coding DCT- JPEG Standard Progressive
image compression- Sub-band coding algorithms Design of Filter banks Wavelet based
compression EPIC, SPIHT coders JPEG 2000 standards. Image transform -JBIG, JBIG2
VIDEO COMPRESSION
Video Signal Components-Video compression techniques-MPEG video coding- Motion
Compensation- H.261, H.263, MPEG4 and H.264 Codec
TEXT BOOK
1.
Khalid Sayood, Introduction to Data Compression, Morgan Kauffman Publishers /
Elseiver, 4th Edition, 2012
2.
Mark S. Drew and Ze-Nian Li, Fundmental of Multimedia, PHI, 1st Edition, 2014
REFERENCES
1.
David Salomon, Data Compression The Complete Reference, Springer, 2nd Edition, 2007
2.
Yun Q. Shi, Huifang Sun, Image and Video Compression for Multimedia Engineering Fundamentals, Algorithms and Standards, CRC press, 2008
3.
Peter Symes, Digital Video Compression, TMH, 2004
4.
Mark Nelson, Data compression, BPB Publishers, 1998
5.
Mark S. Drew, Ze-Nian Li, Fundamentals of Multimedia, PHI, 1st Edition, 2014
ECE345
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite EEE10, ECE201,ECE205

Objective(s)
To get an overview of different types of power semiconductor devices and
their switching characteristics.
To understand the operation, characteristics and performance parameters
of controlled rectifiers.
To study the operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DCDC switching regulators.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Illustrate the role of Power Electronics as an enabling technology in various
applications such as flexible production systems, energy conservation, renewable
energy, transportation etc.
CO2
Identify a switching power-pole as the basic building block and to use Pulse Width
Modulation to synthesize the desired output.
CO3
Design the switching power pole using the available power semiconductor devices,
their drive circuitry and driver Ics and heat sinks. You will be able to model these
in PSPICE
CO4
Describe the knowledge of the basic concepts of dc dc converter in steady state in
continuous and discontinuous models and be able to analyze basic converter
topologies
Department of ECE
102
CO5
Analyze the average model of the building block, quickly simulate the dynamic
performance of dc dc converter and compare them with their switching counter
parts
CO6
Apply the knowledge of various changers and choppers in motors
CO7
Demonstrate the applications of industrial electronics and to design small scale
appliances
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
M
M
CO3
H
M
L
L
M
CO4
H
M
L
CO5
H
M
L
CO6
M
L
CO7
H
H
M
L
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
POWER SWITCHES, COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMS
Principles and Methods of power electric conversion Semiconductor power switches
Components and systems
POWER ELECTRONICS CONVERTERS
AC/DC converters (Rectifiers) DC/AC converters (Inverters) AC/AC converters (Changers)
DC/DC converters (Choppers)
POWER ELECTRONICS CONTROLS
Phase modulation Block modulation Pulse width modulation Space vector modulation
MOTOR CONTROL
AC voltage controller Zero voltage switches Synchronous tap changer DC motors phase
control Induction motor DC series motor chopper control Stepper motors Servo PLL
control of DC motors
GENERAL APPLICATIONS
Capacitor charging applications Power supplies UPS Automotive applications Power
electronics and clean energy Introduction to Industrial Robots
TEXT BOOKS
1. Valery Vodovozov, Introduction to Power Electronics, free e-book at bookboon.com
2. Andrzej M. Trzynadlowski, Introduction to Modern Power Electronics, Wiley India,
2nd Edition, 2010
3. Biswanath Paul, Industrial Electronics and Control: Including Programmable Logic Controller,
PHI, 2nd Edition, 2009
REFERENCES
1. P C Sen, Power Electronics, TMH, 2008
Department of ECE
103
ECE 346
OPTO ELECTRONICS DEVICES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite PHY131, PHY132, ECE201, ECE205, ECE209

Objective(s) Understand the analysis of the operation and performance of optoelectronic
materials
Understand design criteria for semiconductor optical sources (including
light emitting diodes and laser diodes) for a variety of applications
Understand design criteria for semiconductor optical detectors (including
photodiodes and solar cells) for a variety of applications
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Describe the optical properties of semiconductors
CO2
Describe operating principles and structures of display devices like LED, LCD,
Plasma
CO3
Explain the laser operating principles and structures
CO4
Explain the photo detectors principle and performance
CO5
Describe opto electronic modulation and switching devices
CO6
Analyse the various integration of opto electronics circuits
CO
CO1
H
L
CO2
H
L
CO3
H
L
CO4
H
M
CO5
H
M
CO6
H
H
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ELEMENTS OF LIGHT AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS
Review of semiconductor materials-Wave nature of light, Polarization, Interference, Diffraction,
Light Source, review of Quantum Mechanical concept, Review of Solid State Physics, Review of
Semiconductor Physics, Semiconductor Junction Device, Review.
DISPLAY DEVICES AND LASERS
Introduction, Optical absorption - Photo Luminescence, Cathode Luminescence, Electro
Luminescence, Injection Luminescence, LED, Plasma Displays, Liquid Crystal Displays,
Numeric Display, Laser Emission, Absorption, Radiation, Population Inversion, Optical feedback,
Threshold condition, Laser Modes, Classes of Lasers, Mode Locking, Laser applications.
OPTICAL DETECTION DEVICES
Photo detector, Thermal detector, Photon Devices, Photo Conductors, Photo Diodes, Detector
Performance. BER calculation.
Department of ECE
104
OPTOELECTRONIC MODULATOR AND SWITCHING DEVICES
Introduction, Analog and Digital Modulation, Electro-Optic Modulators, Magneto Optic Devices,
Acoustics devices, Optical, Switching and Logic Devices-Optical amplifiers.
OPTOELECTRONIC INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Introduction, hybrid and Monolithic Integration, Applications of Opto Electronics Integrated
Circuits, Integrated transmitters and Receivers, Guided wave devices-Optical waveguides.
TEXT BOOK
1. J.Wilson and J.Haukes, Opto Electronics An Introduction, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.,
Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
2. SC Gupta,Optoelectronic Devices and systems,PHI,2005
REFERENCES
1. Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Opto Electronic Devices, Prentice Hall of India Pvt., Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2003.
2. Jasprit Singh, OptoElectronics An Introduction to materials and Devices, McGrawHill International Edition, 1998.
L
T
P
C
TELECOMMUNICATION AND SWITCHING
NETWORKS
3
0
0
3
Objective(s) The Objective(s) of the course is to provide a sound understanding of the
fundamentals of telecommunication networks and to understand the design
fundamentals and basic performance evaluation techniques of switching networks.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Identify the fundamental concepts and components in a telecommunication.
CO2
Identify various types of switches and their roles in telephone network.
CO3
Evaluate Telecommunication network traffic solutions.
CO4
Investigate and define various types of networks appropriate for pre specified
applications and operation scenarios.
CO5
Identify user demands and appropriate network designs for specific demands.
CO
CO1
H
M
L
L
CO2
H
M
L
L
CO3
H
H
L
L
L
CO4
H
H
L
M
H
L
L
L
L
CO5
H
H
L
M
H
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
ECE 347
Department of ECE
105
Course Topic(s)
EVOLUTION OF TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCHING AND CIRCUITS
Evolution of Public Switched Telecommunication Networks Manual switching system, rotary
dial telephone ,step-by-step switching, Stronger exchange, Crossbar exchange, Stored programme
exchange Digital exchange Basic Tele communication equipments Telephone handset, Hybrid
circuit, Echo suppressors and cancellers, PCM coders, Modems and Relays.
ELECTRONIC SWITCHING
Circuit Switching, Message switching, Space Division switching- Centralized stored programme
switching, Time switching, Spare switching, Combination switching Digital switching system
hardware configuration, Switching system software, Organization, Switching system call
processing software, Hardware software integration.
TELECOMMUNICATION SIGNALLING AND TRAFFIC
Channel associated signalling, Common channel signalling, SS7 signalling protocol, SS7 protocol
architecture, Concept of Telecommunication traffic, Traffic load ,Blocking probability, Erlang B
& C, Congestion Formula -Grade of service, Modelling switching systems, Blocking models and
Delay systems-Case studies
INEGRATED DIGITAL NETWORKS
Subscriber loop characteristics, Local access wire line and wireless PCM / TDM carrier standards
transmission line codes, Digital multiplexing techniques, Synchronous, Asynchronous,
Plesiocronous multiplexing techniques, SONET / SDH, Integrated Digital Network (IDN)
environment Principles of Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Cellular Mobile
Communication Principles.
DATA NETWORKS
Data transmission in PSTN Connection oriented and Connection less protocols packet
switching ISO-OSI architecture-Satellite based data networks Multiple access techniques
LAN, WAN standards TCP / IP Internet Principle of ATM networks-Optical Network,
Protocol stacks, Internetworking protocol architecture, ISDN server standards, Numbering
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Viswanathan. T, Telecommunication Switching System and Networks, PHI, 2006
2.
Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking TMH, 5th Edition, 2013
3.
J. E. Flood, Telecommunications Switching Traffic and Networks, Pearson India, 2007
REFERENCES
1.
L. S. Lawton, Integrated Digital Networks, Galgotta Publications, 2006
2.
Syed R. Ali, Digital Switching Systems: System reliability and analysis, TMH, 2002
L
T
P
C
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
MODELLING AND SIMULATION
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite PHY 111, MAT103, MAT 215, ECE201, ECE206, ECE302
Objective(s) At the end of the course the student will be able to design and simulate the
communication system based on free space and multipath channel and also able to
do the various evaluation techniques for analyzing the performance of simulated
environment.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply the generated random numbers in stationary and correlated random
sequences along with Goodness of fit test.
CO2
Demonstrate the modelling of communication system blocks under the
circumstances of various noise and interference.
CO3
Apply the knowledge of estimator for the performance measure of simulation using
Monte Carlo method.
ECE 348
Department of ECE
106
CO4
CO5
Create simulation models of various types using a numerical software.

Apply the simulation and modelling concepts to a communication like QAM
Digital radio link, Satellite communication.
CO
CO1
M
H
H
M
M
H
CO2
H
M
M
CO3
H
M
M
M
H
CO4
H
H
M
M
M
H
CO5
M
L
H
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
SIMULATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES AND RANDOM PROCESS
Generation of random number and sequences, Gaussian and uniform random numbers, Correlated
random sequences, testing of random numbers generators, Stationary and uncorrelatedness,
Goodness of fit test.
MODELLING OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Radio frequency and optical sources, Analog and Digital signals, Communication channel and
models, free space channels, Multipath channel and discrete channel noise and interference
ESTIMATION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURE FOR SIMULATION
Quality of estimator, Estimation of SNR, Probability density function and bit error rate, Monte
Carlo method, Importance sampling method, Extreme value theory.
SIMULATION AND MODELLING METHODOLOGY
Simulation environment, Modelling considerations, Performance evaluation techniques, Error
source simulation Validation.
CASE STUDIES
Simulations of QAM digital radio link in a fading environment - Light wave communication link
and satellite system.
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Michel C. Jeruchim, Philip Balaban and K. Sam Shanmugan, Simulation of
Communication Systems, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2013
2.
Averill M. Law, Simulation Modelling and Analysis, TMH, 2014
REFERENCES
1.
Geoffrey Gordon, System Simulation, PHI, 2nd Edition, 1998
2.
William Turin, Performance Analysis and Modelling of Digital Transmission Systems,
Kluwer Press, 2004
3.
Jerry Banks, John S. Carson, Barry L. Nelson, David M. Nicol, P. Shahabudeen, DiscreteEvent System Simulation, Pearson India, 2009
Department of ECE
107
ECE 349
RADAR AND NAVIGATION AIDS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) The Main Objective(s) of this course is to make the students understand the basic
concept in the field of Radar and Navigational aids. Students are taught about
different types of Radar Systems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Define the fundamentals of RADAR.
CO2
Describe the different types of RADAR and their operations.
CO3
Illustrate the need for various signal detection in RADAR technique.
CO4
Analyse the use of RADAR navigation techniques.
CO
CO1
H
M
L
H
CO2
H
M
L
H
CO3
H
H
CO4
H
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
RANGE, EQUATION AND RADAR TYPES
Basic RADAR concepts, RADAR block diagram, RADAR frequencies, Applications Range
parameters, pulsed radars, signal to noise ratio, integration of pluses beam parameters, system
losses and propagation effects MTI, CW and pulse-Doppler radar, Delay lines tracking radar,
monopulse, sequential, simultaneous, conical scan and monopulse trackers, Beacons.
TRANSMITTERS, RECEIVERS AND ANTENNA
Introduction ECM and ECCM, Klystron, Magnetron, TWT amplifiers and oscillators, crossed
fields devices, parabolic cassegrainian, coefficient squares antennas, Radomes, feeds, receivers,
performance figures, Displays scope and PPI duplexers.
RADAR SIGNALS DETECTION IN PRESENCE OF NOISE
RADAR operator, Signal Management, MF, correlation detection, detector characteristics,
automatic detection, CFAR receiver, pulse compression and classification of targets with Radar.
RADAR WAVES PROPAGATION AND CLUTTER
Plane earth and spherical earth problem , Refraction and diffraction, GTD Analysers, Surface and
Sea Clutter, Detection of targets, effects of weather on radar, Automatic Detection finder, Range
and accuracy of detection finder.
NAVIGATIONAL AIDS
Synthetic Aperture, Over the Horizon radar, ARSR, ASR, Bistatic and monostatic radars,
LORAN, ILS, GCA, direction finder, VOR concepts, airborne Doppler navigation, GPS-Principle
of operation, GPS receiver.
Department of ECE
108
TEXT BOOKS
1.
G. S. N. Raju, Radar Engineering and Fundamentals of Navigational Aids, I. K.
International, 2008
2.
Merrill I. Skolnik, Introduction to Radar Systems, TMH, 3rd Edition, 2008
3.
Peyton Z. Peebles, Jr. Radar Principles, Wiley India, 2008
REFERENCES
1.
N S Nagaraja, Elements of Electronic Navigation, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2006
2.
J.C. Toomay, Paul J. Hannen, Radar principles, Scitech, 3rd Edition, 2004
ECE350
ENGINEERING ACOUSTICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite PHY131,ECE209
Objective(s) The Main Objective(s) of this course is to introduce the fundamental concepts of
acoustical analysis to engineers with an emphasis on the wave approach and taught
about wave propagation, sound radiation, absorption and transmission.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Develop the knowledge on the fundamental assumptions related to the derivation
of the wave equation and apply it for 1-D and 3-D solutions to the wave equation.
CO2
Explain the basic operation of various types of microphones.
CO3
Explain the basic operation of different loud speaker types.
CO4
Apply the reasoning informed by knowledge on sound fields in rooms, enclosures
to assess societal. Safety and health issues.
CO
CO1
H
CO2
H
L
M
M
CO3
H
L
M
M
CO4
L
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION, WAVE EQUATION AND SOLUTIONS
Introduction Terminology Wave equation Solution of wave equations in one dimension
Solutions of Helmholtz wave equation in three dimension.
ELECTRO MECHANICAL ACOUSTIC CIRCUITS, MICROPHONES
Mechanical circuits Acoustical circuits Transducers Circuit theorems, energy and power
General characteristics of microphones Pressure microphones Pressure-gradient microphones
Combination microphones.
LOUDSPEAKERS
Basic theory of electrodynamic loudspeakers Design factors affecting direct-radiator loud
speaker performance Simple enclosures Bass-reflex enclosures 2-port network for small
enclosures Transmission-line enclosures Multiple drive units.
CELLPHONE ACOUSTICS, HORN LOUDSPEAKERS
Department of ECE
109
Acoustical transducer for cell phones Type approval testing of cell phones Horn drive units
Horns.
SOUND IN ENCLOSURES
Sound fields in small, regularly shaped enclosures Sound in large enclosures Home room
design.
TEXT BOOK
1.
Leo L. Beranek, Tim J. Mellow, Acoustics: Sound Fields and Transducers, Academic
Press/Elsevier, 2012
ECE351
TESTING OF VLSI CIRCUITS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE210, ECE283, ECE285, ECE211, ECE343

Objective(s) To understand about testing, fault models and types of simulations.
To acquire knowledge in generation of test vectors for combinational and
sequential circuits.
To understand the concepts behind testable design, BIST and fault diagnosis.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Describe fault models applicable to a circuit.
CO2
Simulate a circuit to find possible faults.
CO3
Design circuits which can be tested with automate test Equiplment.
CO4
Generate an automatic test pattern that can test a VLSI circuit.
CO5
Diagnose for faults in a design.
CO
CO1
H
CO2
H
M
L
L
L
L
L
CO3
H
M
L
CO4
H
CO5
H
M
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Methods
Indirect Methods
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
FAULT MODELLING AND FAULT SIMULATION
Introduction to testing - Faults in Digital Circuits - Modelling of faults - Functional modelling at
logical, register and structural levels Logic simulation Types of simulation Event Driven
simulation - Delay models Fault Modelling - Logical Fault Models Fault detection.
TEST GENERATION FOR CIRCUITS
Test generation basics -Implication - Structural test generation preliminaries - Non-structural test
generation techniques -Test generation systems - Classification of sequential ATPG methods and
faults - Fault collapsing - Fault simulation - Test generation for synchronous circuits - Test
generation for asynchronous circuits - Test compaction - IDDQ testing.
Department of ECE
110
DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY
Testability - Ad Hoc Design for Testability Techniques Controllability and Observability by
means of scan registers- Generic scan path designs Board level and system level DFT approaches
Advanced Scan concepts.
BUILT IN SELF-TEST
Built-In Self-Test concepts BIST Design Rules - Test pattern generation for BIST- Exhaustive
Testing, Pseudorandom Testing, Pseudo exhaustive Testing Generic offline BIST architecture
Specific BIST architecture Advanced BIST Concepts - Memory testing - Traditional tests March tests - Pseudorandom memory tests.
FAULT DIAGNOSIS, SELF-CHECKING DESIGN
Logical Level Diagnosis Diagnosis by UUT reduction Fault Diagnosis for Combinational
Circuits Self-checking design System Level Diagnosis.
REFERENCES
1.
M. Abramovici, et al., Digital systems and Testable Design, Jaico IEEE Publishers, 2002
2.
Nirajjha, S. Gupta, Testing of Digital systems, Cambridge Press, 2003
3.
Laung -T Wang, et al (Editors), VLSI Test principles and architectures Design for
Testability, Kaufmann Publishers, 2006
4.
Parag. K. Lala, An Introduction to Logic Circuit Testing, Morgan Publishers, 2005
5.
Parag. K. Lala, Digital Circuit Testing and Testability, Kluwer Academic, 2002
6.
M. L. Bushnell, V. D. Agrawal, Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits, Kluwer Academic, 2002
L
T
P
C
ARM PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND
APPLICATIONS
3
0
0
3
Objective(s) The Main Objective(s) of this course is to enhance the understanding and
application of ARMv7 microcontroller, the classical ARM architecture and
assembly language programming, ARM organization and implementation and
architecture support for system development.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Analyse ARM processor architecture and microcontroller Configuration.
CO2
Appraise abstraction in hardware/software design and the tradeoffs in processor
design
CO3
Demonstrate the handling of ARM instructions, interrupts, data processing
instructions, data transfer instructions and execution of programming languages.
CO4
Demonstrate the ARM memory interface and advanced NEON coding.
CO5
Analyse the advancements in the design of ARM processors.
CO
CO1
H
L
H
CO2
M
M
CO3
H
L
H
CO4
M
H
H
M
CO5
M
H
L
M
M
M
ECE352
Department of ECE
111
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ARM CORTEX-A PROCESSORS ARCHITECTURE
Introduction - System-on-Chip Embedded systems ARM architecture versions Architecture
history and extensions Basics of Cortex architecture Processors and Pipelining review Tools,
Operating systems for Cortex Instruction sets Modes Registers Instruction pipelines
Branch prediction.
ARM INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction to Assembly Language comparison with other assembly languages ARM tools
assembly language Introduction to GNU assembler Interworking Identifying assembly code
Instruction set basics Data processing operations Multiplication operations Memory
instructions Branches Integer SIMD instructions Saturating arithmetic Miscellaneous
instructions Floating Point Introducing NEON (advanced SIMD)
MEMORY, EXCEPTION AND INTERRUPT HANDLING
Caches Memory management Memory ordering Exception handling: Types of exception,
entering an exception handler, exiting an exception handler, Exception mode summary, Vector
table, Distinction between FIQ and RIQ, Return instruction Interrupt handling: External interrupt
request, Interrupt controller Other exception handlers.
BOOT CODE, OPTIMISING CODE
Boot code: Booting a system, Configuration, Booting Linux Porting Application Binary
interface: Procedure standard, mixing assembly and C language Profiler output - Writing NEON
code.
POWER MANAGEMENT, MULTIPROCESSING, PARALLELISM
Power Management: Power and Clock Introduction to Multiprocessors SMP architecture
Parallelising software and its issues Virtualisation Introduction big.Little
TEXT BOOK
1.
Cortex-A Series Programmers Guide -Version: 3.0, ARM, www.arm.com.
ECE353
CONSUMER ELECTRONICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE210, ECE285, ECE309, EEE101, PHY131

Objective(s) The main Objective(s) of this course is that the graduates will equipped with the
valid and relevant skills and knowledge required being able to enter into Consumer
Electronics industry.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Recognise basic consumer electronic components and devices used for different
electronic functions.
CO2
Identify the applications and functions of consumer electronics in Engineering.
CO3
Explain the working principle, of consumer electronic devices particularly AV
systems, Household appliances and Office appliances and apply it to troubleshoot
them
Department of ECE
112
CO
CO1
H
L
L
CO2
H
H
L
L
L
CO3
H
M
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Wave motion, Microphones, Loud Speaker, Speaker baffles and enclosures, Acoustics, Loud
speaker systems, Optical recording and reproduction, Mono, stereo, quad phony, Stereo
multiplexing, Equalizer and Mixer, Eight track system, Walkman, Theatre sound system, Hi-Fi
audio system, Digital audio, CD player, CD-ROM, Audio compact discs.
VIDEO SYSTEMS
NTSC system, PAL system, SECAM system, Television control, Video disc, Record and
playback, Remote control, Canon portable video system, Laser vision video disc system
Interactive video system.
ELECTRONICS GADGETS
Facsimile, Xerography, Calculators, Digital Clocks, Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, In-car
computers.
HOME APPLIANCES
Microwave Oven, Washing Machine, Air conditioner, Refrigerator, Dishwasher.
OFFICE APPLIANCES
Airline reservation, bar coder, ATMs, Set-top-Box, Telephones.
TEXT BOOK
1.
Bali S. P, Consumer Electronics, Pearson India, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
Philip Hoff, Consumer Electronics for Engineers Cambridge University Press, 1998
2.
K. Blair, Benson Audio Engineering Hand book, 2001
3.
R. R. Gulati, Colour Television-principles and Practice, Wiley India, 2008
4.
R. R. Gulati, Complete Satellite & Cable Television, New age International Publisher,
2008
5.
RC Vijay, Colour Television Servicing, BPB Publication, 2007
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite PHY131,PHY132, EEE101, ECE 201,ECE205, ECE210, ECE285, ECE309
Objective(s) The Main Objective(s) of the course is
To learn and understand basic concepts of Nano-electronics.
To describe the principle and the operation of nano-electronic devices.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Demonstrate knowledge of nano electronic devices, sensors and transducers and
their applications in nanotechnology.
ECE358
Department of ECE
NANOELECTRONICS
113
CO2
CO3
Apply the fundamental science and quantum mechanics in nano-electronics.

Interpret the knowledge of a quantum well, quantum transport and tunnelling
effects.
CO4
Demonstrate knowledge of Nano-MOSFET and non-conventional MOSFET
structures
CO
CO1
H
M
L
L
L
L
L
L
CO2
H
M
L
CO3
H
M
L
L
L
CO4
H
M
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION OF NANOELECTRONICS
The Top-Down Approach; The Bottom-Up Approach; Why Nano-electronics; Nanotechnology
Potential; MOS Scaling theory-Issues in scaling MOS transistors; Short channel effects;
Requirements for non-classical MOS transistor; Metal gate transistor- Motivation, requirements,
Integration Issues; High-k gate based MOSFET-Motivation, requirements, integration issues of
high-k.
QUANTUM MECHANICS OF ELECTRONS
General postulates of quantum mechanics; Time-independent Schrodingers equation- boundary
conditions on the Wave function; Analogies between quantum mechanics and classical
electromagnetic; probabilistic current density; Multiple particle systems; Spin and angular
Momentum.
FREE AND CONFINED ELECTRONS
Free Electrons; Free electron gas theory of metals; Electrons confined to a bounded region of
space and quantum numbers; partially confined electrons- finite potential wells; Quantum wells;
Quantum wires; Quantum dots.
TUNNEL JUNCTIONS AND APPLICATIONS OF TUNNELLING
Tunnelling through a potential barrier; Potential energy profiles for material interfaces;
Applications of tunnelling; Coulomb blockade, Single-Electron Transistor (SET)
GERMANIUM NANO MOSFETS
Strain, Quantization; Advantages of germanium over silicon; PMOS versus NMOS; Compound
semiconductors - material properties; MOSFETs; Compound semiconductors MOSFETs in the
context of channel quantization and strain; Hetero structure MOSFETs exploiting novel
materials, strain, quantization.
NON-CONVENTIONAL MOSFET STRUCTURES
SOI-PDSOI and FDSOI; Ultrathin body SOI-double gate transistors, integration issues; Vertical
transistorsFinFET and Surround gate FET; Carbon Nano-tube Transistors (CNT);
Semiconductor Nano-wire FETs and SETs; Molecular SETs and Molecular Electronics.
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Yuan Taur, Tak H. Ning, Fundamentals of Modern VLSI Devices, Cambridge University
Press, 2013
Department of ECE
114
2.
George W. Hanson, Fundamental of Nanoelectronics, Pearson India, 2009
REFERENCES
1.
Plummer, Deal, Griffin, Silicon VLSI Technology: Fundamentals, Practice and Modelling,
Pearson India, 2015
2.
C. Richard Brundle, Charles A. Evans Jr., Shaun Wilson, (Editors), Encyclopaedia of
Materials Characterization, Butterworth-Heinemann/Elsevier, 1992
ECE359
DSP BASED SYSTEM DESIGN
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite MAT202, ECE206, ECE210, ECE285, ECE309

1. Development of real-time digital signal processing (DSP) systems using a
DSP microprocessor.
2. Apply previous signal processing knowledge in real-time digital signal
processing systems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Design analog to digital converter and digital to analog converters, calculate their
performance metrics, architectures and signal conditioning.
CO2
Identify over-sampling theory.
CO3
Implement methods of linear time invariant systems (LTI) and effects of finite
precision representation on the realization of LTI and fast Fourier transform (FFT)
CO4
Implement real-time systems as mini project which apply the signal processing
techniques studied.
CO
CO1
H
H
H
H
M
M
M
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
H
L
M
CO4
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ADCs, DACs, SAMPLING THEORY
Coding and Quantising Sampling theory Data converter AC Errors Data converter
specifications.
DIGITAL FILTERS
Analog signal processing complete DSP system Digital data processing the running average
filter representation of processing systems feedback filters.
FREQUENCY DOMAIN PROCESSING
DFT FFT STFT DWT Signal processing toolset.
AUDIO CODING, MODULATION USING DSP
Department of ECE
115
MPEG Audio Coding MPEG Advanced Audio Coding Dolby AC3 AM FM PM FSK
PSK MSK QAM Spread Spectrum Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Frequency
Hopping OFDM.
DSP HARDWARE
DSP theory for hardware designers Theory, applications and implementations DSP
applications DSP implementations Review of processors and systems Digital signal
processor architecture Processor hardware units Fixed point and floating point representation
FIR, IIR filters in fixed point system DSP programming examples.
TEXT BOOK
1.
Kenton Williston (Editor), Digital Signal Processing: World Class Designs: World Class
Design, Newnes/Elsevier, 2009
ECE425
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite CSE102, ECE210, ECE306, ECE307, ECE309

Demonstrate an understanding of network management concept,
standards, and protocols including Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) and Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) protocols.
Show how to apply network management standards to manage practical
networks.
Demonstrate their in-depth understanding of various aspects of network
management by working on group projects involving research on state-ofthe-art network management technologies and presenting their findings to
the class.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Describe the fundamental concepts of managing the baseband and broadband
networks
CO2
Demonstrate how to correctly maintain LAN computer systems using SNMP.
CO3
Identify the network problems and solve it in Local Area Networks
CO4
Explain the various level of network management applications
CO
CO1
H
L
CO2
H
H
L
L
CO3
H
H
L
L
CO4
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
NETWORK MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW
Communications protocols and standards Network Management goals Organization and
functions Network and System ManagementAnalogy of Telephone Network Management,
Department of ECE
116
Present and Future scenario- Network Topology LAN Network node components WAN
ISDN Transmission Technology.
NETWORK STANDARDS, MODELS AND LANGUAGE
OSI Network management model Organizational model Information model, communication
model Abstract Syntax Notation - Encoding structure Macros Functional model CMIP/CMISCase studies.
SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL (SNMP)
SNMP model Organizational model System Overview The information model
communication model Functional model SNMP proxy server Management information
Major changes in SNMPV2 and its architecture-MI & MIB RM, RMON1, RMON2
BROADBAND NETWORK MANAGEMENT
Broadband networks and services ATM Technology VP, VC ATM Packet, integrated
service, ATM LAN emulation, Virtual LAN ATM Network Management ATM Network
reference model integrated local management interface ATM Management Information base
M1, M2, M3, M4 Interface-ATM RM study of Internet traffic using RMON-CasATM digital
exchange Interface Management.
NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS
Configuration management Fault management performance management event correlation
Techniques security Management Accounting management Report Management-Policy
based management-Service level management.
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Mani Subramanian, Network Management Principles and Practice, Pearson India, 2nd
Edition, 2012
2.
Stephen B. Morris, Network Management MIBs and MPLS: Principles, Design and
Implementation, Pearson International, 2003
REFERENCES
1.
Salah Aidarous, Thomas Plevayk, Telecommunications Network Management:
Technologies and Implementations, Wiley-IEEE Press, 1998
2.
Lakshmi G. Raman, Fundamentals of Telecommunication Network Management, WileyIEEE Press, 1999
ECE426
SPREAD SPECTRUM TECHNIQUES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) The course focuses on the principles and theory of spread spectrum
communications with emphasis on CDMA. After the course, a student has in-depth
knowledge about CDMA techniques and their applications in wireless
communications.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Describe the features of spread spectrum system.
CO2
Explain about the basics of spread spectrum.
CO3
Analyse the performance of spreading code acquisition and tracking circuits
CO4
Analyse the performance of spread spectrum systems in presence of jamming
CO5
Apply the spread spectrum techniques
CO6
Grasp the research on advanced topics and summarise it in writing
Department of ECE
117
CO
CO1
M
M
M
L
CO2
M
M
CO3
M
H
CO4
M
H
CO5
M
H
L
L
L
M
L
CO6
H
M
H
M
L
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Methods
Indirect Methods
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
FEATURES AND NEW TRENDS
Definition and features of spread spectrum systems Historical remarks on spread spectrum
New trends of commercial applications.
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPREAD SPECTRUM
Direct-sequence spread spectrum systems Frequency-hopping and time-hopping spread
spectrum systems Chirp spread spectrum systems Hybrid systems.
SPREADING SEQUENCES
Maximal-length sequences Gold codes Non-linear codes Walsh orthogonal codes PN signal
analysis PN code acquisition and tracking Dither loop Serial and parallel acquisition method.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Performance of spread spectrum system in a jamming environment Multi-Carrier CDMA
System Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing System.
APPLICATIONS
Commercial applications of spread spectrum global positioning system, mobile
communications, digital broadcasting, wireless LAN.
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Don Torrieri, Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication Systems, Springer, 2005
2.
Roger L. Peterson, Rodger E. Ziemer, David E. Borth, Introduction to Spread Spectrum
Communications, PHI, 1995
3.
Robert C. Dixon, Spread Spectrum Systems with Commercial Applications, Wiley India,
3rd Edition, 2010
REFERENCES
1.
Andrew J. Viterbi, CDMA-Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication, Addison Wesley, 1995
2.
Marvin Simon, Jim Omura, Robert Scholtz, Barry Levitt, Spread Spectrum
Communications Handbook (electronic edition), TMH, 2002
Department of ECE
118
ECE429
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite MAT205, ECE206, ECE 301,ECE433

Objective(s) To make students
Understanding of standard advanced image processing algorithms.
Understanding of image processing system development.
Understanding of team design techniques.
Experience in algorithm development and testing.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply transforms like DFT, Haar, KL, Wavelet and DCT on digital images
CO2
Design frequency domain filters and spatial filters for image enhancement
CO3
Identify the image degradation models which includes linear, position-invariant
CO4
Analyze the methodologies for image Segmentation
CO5
Analyze the concepts in basic morphological algorithms
CO
CO1
H
M
H
CO2
H
M
CO3
H
H
M
H
CO4
H
H
CO5
H
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
IMAGE ANALYSIS AND IMAGE TRANSFORMS
Components of an image processing system - image representation gray scale and colour images
Basic relationship between pixels- image sampling and quantization two dimensional
orthogonal transforms - DFT, FFT, Haar transform, KLT, DCT, wavelets
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT
Image enhancement in the Spatial Domain - background basic grey level transformations
histogram processing enhancement using arithmetic/logic operations basic of spatial filtering
smoothing spatial filters sharpening spatial filters combining spatial enhancement methods
image enhancement in the frequency domain -background introduction to Fourier transform
and frequency domain smoothing frequency domain filters sharpening frequency domain
filters homomorphic filters implementation
IMAGE RESTORATION
Model of the image degradation process noise models restoration in the presence of noise periodic noise reduction by frequency domain filtering Linear, position invariant degradation
estimating the degrading function inverse filtering minimum mean square error filtering
constrained least square filtering geometric mean filter geometric transformations
IMAGE SEGMENTATION
Detection of discontinuities edge linking and boundary detection threshold region based
segmentation segmentation by morphological watersheds use of motion in segmentation
Department of ECE
119
MORPHOLOGICAL IMAGE PROCESSING
Preliminaries dilation and erosion opening and closing hit-or-miss transformation some
basic morphological algorithms extension to gray scale images boundary descriptors regional
descriptors use of principal components for description relational descriptors-Object
Recognition
TEXT BOOK
1.
Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Pearson India, 3 rd
Edition, 2013
REFERENCES
1.
Anil. K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, PHI, 2001
2.
William K. Pratt, Digital image processing: PIKS Scientific Inside, Wiley International,
4th Edition, 2012
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite EEE101, PHY131, PHY132, ECE201, ECE205, MAT202, ECE209, ECE210,
ECE285, ECE307, ECE309
Objective(s) To give a brief introduction to MIC techniques covers a sufficient selection of
technology used in MICs such that the fabrication and operation of many
microwave devices will be understandable.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Differentiate distributed circuits and lumped circuits.
CO2
Design microwave amplifiers for a desired gain, based on the small signal
scattering parameters of the active device for specific configuration and bias
condition.
CO3
Perform trade off between amplifiers parameters such as noise figure, VSWR gain
and stability to meet the desired amplifiers specifications.
CO4
Design of oscillators and selection of antennas for the specific applications
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
M
H
CO4
L
L
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS-AN OVERVIEW
Introduction - MMIC- technology, advantages and applications, Active device technologies,
design approaches, multichip module technology, substrates - fabrication materials properties and
characteristics
ECE430
MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Department of ECE
120
PASSIVE COMPONENTS
Inductors, capacitors, resistors, micro strip components, coplanar circuits, multilayer techniques,
micro machined passive components, switches and attenuators filter design with examples
AMPLIFIERS
Stability and gain analysis, matching techniques, reactively matched amplifier design, LNA
amplifiers Noise figure improvement techniques
OSCILLATORS
Design principles, active device CAD techniques for large signal oscillators design, phase noise,
MMIC VCO, mixers, stability analysis
INTEGRATED ANTENNAS AND MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES
Integrated antenna selection, photonic band gap antennas, micro machined antenna, micro electro
mechanical system antennas, test fixture measurements, probe station measurements, thermal and
cryogenic measurements, experimental field probing techniques
REFERENCES
1. Ravender Goyal, Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit: Technology and Design
(Microwave Library), Artech House, 1989
2. Allen A. Sweet, Designing Bipolar Transistor Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits Artech
House, 2008
3. Arjuna Marzuki, Ahmad Ismat Bin Abdul Rahim and Mourad Loulou, Advances in
Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuits: Modelling and Design Technologies (Premier
Reference source), IGI Global, 2012
4. David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, Wiley India, 3rd Edition, 2012
5. Annapurna Das and Sisir K. Das, Microwave Engineering, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2009
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite MAT103, MAT104, MAT202, ECE201, ECE202, MAT215, ECE206, ECE301,
ECE302, ECE303, ECE305, ECE316
Distinguish the major cellular communication standards (1G/2G/3G
systems)
Characterize the trade-offs among frequency reuse, signal-to-interference
ratio, capacity, and spectral efficiency
Characterize large-scale path loss and shadowing
Characterize small-scale fading in terms of Doppler spectrum, coherence
time, power delay profile, and coherence bandwidth
Analyse the error probabilities for common modulation schemes
Analyse the performance of trunked radio systems
Describe different types of diversity and how they improve performance
for mobile radio channels
Describe simple equalization schemes
Characterize TDMA, FDMA and CDMA
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the radio signal propagation model issues and analyse their impact on
communication system performance.
CO2
Explain the various signal processing and coding techniques in combining channel
uncertainties.
CO3
Analyse the various radio spread spectrum allocation techniques in multi-uses
systems and their impact on networks capacity.
ECE431
Department of ECE
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
121
CO4
Demonstrate the ability to independent acquire knowledge about the state of the
art in research and development for wireless systems.
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
L
CO3
H
M
L
CO4
H
M
H
M
L
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASICS, WIRELESS PROPAGATION CHANNELS
Overview of Probability theory and random process, signal space concepts, linear algebra,
detection theory History of wireless services Types of services Requirements for the service
Economic and social aspects Multipath propagation Spectrum limitations Limited energy
User mobility Noise limited systems Interference limited systems Free space attenuation
Diffraction Scattering Time variant and invariant two path models Small scale fading with
and without a dominant component The causes of delay dispersion Theoretic description of
wireless channel WSSUS model UWB channels Channel models: Introduction
Narrowband models Wideband models Antennas for mobile stations Antennas for Base
stations
TRANSCEIVERS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING
Structure of a wireless communication link Modulation formats Demodulator structure and
error probability in AWG noise channels Average BER classical method Physical cause of
error floors Computation of error floor using group delay method Bit error probability
Diversity: Introduction Micro diversity Combination of signals Error probability in fading
channels with diversity Transmit diversity
EQUALISERS, MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEMS
Fundamentals of coding and information theory Equalisers: Introduction Linear equalisers
Decision feedback equalisers Maximum likelihood sequence estimation, Viterbi decoder
Comparison of equaliser structures Fractionally spaced equalisers Blind equalisers FDMA
TDMA Packet Radio Duplexing principles of cellular networks FHMA CDMA Cellular
CDMA systems Multiuser detection OFDM Introduction, Principle Smart antennas
Multiple Input and Multiple Output Systems Multiuser MIMO
STANDARDISED WIRELESS SYSTEMS (2G, 3G, 4G)
GSM (2G, 2.5G, GPRS/EDGE): Historical overview, System overview, the air interface, Logical
and physical channels, Synchronisation, coding, equaliser, circuit-switched data transmission,
establishing a connection and handover IS-95, CDMA 2000: Historical overview, System
overview, Air interface, Coding, Spreading and Modulation, Logical and Physical Channels,
Handover, CDMA2000 modes WCDMA/UMTS (3G): Historical and System overviews, Air
interface, Physical and Logical channels, Speech coding, multiplexing and channel coding,
spreading and modulation, Physical layer procedures 3GPP LTE (4G): Introduction, System
overview, Physical Layer, Logical and Physical channels, Physical Layer procedures
Department of ECE
122
OTHER WIRELESS STANDARDS (5G, WiMAX, WIFI)
Broadband Wireless Access: WiMAX/IEEE802.16: History, System overview, Modulation and
Coding, Logical and Physical channels, Multiple-antenna Techniques, Link control Wireless
LAN and Mesh: WLAN, Wi-FI/ IEEE 802.11: Introduction, 802.11a/g, 802.11n, 802.11ac, Packet
transmission in WLAN IEEE 802.15.1, IEEE 802.15.1.2 and IEEE802.15.4 (Bluetooth and
Zigbee) Cognitive Radio(5G): Introduction, Cognitive transceiver architecture, Principles of
interweaving, Spectrum sensing, Spectrum management, Spectrum sharing, Overlay, Underlay
Hierarchical Access (UWB system communications), IEEE 80.2.15.3 Relaying, Multi-Hop and
Cooperative Communications(5G) Pervasive Networks, Dynamic Spectrum Access (5G)
Dynamic Adhoc Wireless Networks (DAWN), MANETS (5G) IEEE 802.21 Media Independent
Hand off IEEE 802.22 Wireless Regional Area Network IEEE 802.25 Omni-Range Area
Network
TEXT BOOK
1.
Andreas F. Molisch, Wireless Communication, Wiley/IEEE, 2nd Edition, 2012
REFERENCES
1.
Andrea Goldsmith, Wireless Communication, Cambridge Press, 2005
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite MAT202, ECE206, ECE301, ECE210, ECE211, ECE285, ECE309
Objective(s) The main Objective(s) of the course is to have a major impact on the technical
areas to which digital signal processing techniques and hardware are being applied.
With an emphasis on techniques for co-design of DSP algorithms and hardware in
order to achieve high performance in terms of throughput, low power consumption,
and design effort, this course provides the professional engineer, researcher, and
student with a firm foundation in the theoretical as well as the practical aspects of
designing high performance DSP integrated circuits
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the procedural flow of system design in DSP and IC.
CO2
Analyse the frequency response and transfer function of DSP systems.
CO3
Compare the performance of various transforms for signal processing.
CO4
Design FIR and IIR filter for the given specifications as a mini project.
CO5
Explain the architectures for DSP systems.
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
H
M
L
L
L
L
CO3
H
M
CO4
H
M
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
CO5
H
M
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
ECE432
Department of ECE
DSP INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
123
Course Topic(s)
VLSI CIRCUIT TECHNOLOGIES
Standard digital signal processors application specific ICs for DSP DSP systems DSP system
design Integrated circuit design MOS transistors - MOS logic VLSI process technologies
trends in CMOS technologies
Digital signal processing sampling of analog signals, selection of sample frequency Signalprocessing systems frequency response, Transfer functions signal flow graphs Filter
structures adaptive DSP algorithms DFT-The discrete Fourier transform, FFT-The Fast Fourier
Transform algorithm image coding discrete cosine transforms
DIGITAL FILTERS
FIR filters FIR filter structures, FIR chips IIR filters Specifications of IIR filters mapping
of analog transfer functions mapping of analog filter structures Multirate systems
interpolation with an integer factor L sampling rate change with a ratio L/M, multirate filters
finite word length effects parasitic oscillations scaling of signal levels Round-off noise
measuring round-off noise coefficient sensitivity, Sensitivity and noise
DSP ARCHITECTURES
DSP system architectures standard DSP architecture Ideal DSP architectures multiprocessors
and multicomputer systolic and wave front arrays shared memory architectures mapping of
DSP algorithms onto hardware implementation based on complex PEs shared memory
architecture with bit serial PEs
ARITHMETIC UNITS
Conventional number system Redundant number system Residue number system -bit-parallel
and bit-serial arithmetic, basic shift accumulator, reducing the memory size, complex multipliers,
improved shift-accumulator - layout of VLSI circuits, FFT processor, DCT processor and
Interpolator
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Lars Wanhammar, DSP Integrated Circuits, Academic press, 1999
2.
A. V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer, Discrete-time Signal Processing, Pearson India, 3rd
Edition, 2011
REFERENCES
1.
Emmanuel C. Ifeachor, Barry W. Jervis, Digital signal processing: A practical approach,
Pearson India, 2nd Edition, 2009
2.
Sanjit K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: A Computer based approach, TMH, 4th Edition,
2013
L
T
P
C
SPEECH AND AUDIO SIGNAL
ECE433
PROCESSING
3
0
0
3
MAT202,
ECE206,
ECE301
Prerequisite
Objective(s) To provide an introduction to the basic concepts and methodologies for analysis,
modelling, synthesis and coding of speech and music and to provide a foundation
for developing applications and for further study in the field of digital audio
standards and its techniques.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Distinguish the basic concepts of sound waves, human hearing mechanisms and
room acoustics
CO2
Apply the basics of speech analysis
CO3
Analyse the various techniques and algorithms for compact representations of
speech
Department of ECE
124
CO4
Explain speech recognition and speech synthesisers as well as their

implementation issues
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
M
CO3
H
H
L
CO4
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
OVERVIEW OF SIGNAL PROCESSING
Introduction Acoustics fundamentals - Speech production Speech perception Signals and
transforms Digital filters Probability, statistics and estimation theory Pattern recognition
principles
SPEECH ANALYSIS AND CODING
Short Time Fourier Analysis and Synthesis Linear prediction of speech Source estimation
Cepstral analysis
SPEECH AND SPEAKER RECOGNITION
Template matching Hidden Markov Model Refinements for HMMs Large vocabulary
continuous speech recognition The HTK speech recognition system Speaker recognition
DSP Implementations of Speech processing
SPEECH SYNTHESIS AND MODIFICATION
Text-to-Speech front-end Text-to-Speech back-end - Prosodic modification of speech Voice
conversion Non speech and music signals - Music synthesis
DIGITAL AUDIO COMMUNICATION STANDARDS
MPEG Digital Audio coding standard Dolby Digital Audio coding standard Perceptual Audio
Coder Sony systems
TEXTBOOKS
1.
Vijay Madisetti (Editor), Video, Speech, and Audio Signal Processing and Associated
Standards, CRC Press, 2nd Edition, 2010
2.
Ben Gold, Nelson Morgan, Dan Ellis, Speech and Audio Signal Processing: Processing
and Perception of Speech and Music, Wiley India, 2nd Edition, 2011
L
T
P
C
CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK
SECURITY
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite ECE206, ECE210, ECE306, ECE307, ECE285, ECE309
Objective(s) The main Objective(s) of the course is to develop a fundamental understanding of
Cryptography and network security proper practices, policies, technologies and
standards.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the foundations of cryptography and network security.
CO2
Identify common security vulnerability attacks in different networking
environment
ECE434
Department of ECE
125
CO3
CO4
CO5
CO6
Evaluate the risks and threats to digital communication system

Demonstrate the detailed knowledge of the role of encryption to protect the data
Explain the fundamental concepts of different digital signature schemes
Identify the appropriate cryptographic scheme and security mechanism for
different computing environment and information systems
CO7
Identify ethical, professional responsibilities and liabilities in networking
environment and best practices to write a security policy
CO8
Grasp the research on advanced topics like security in cloud computing,wireless
communication & computing and summarize it in writing
CO
CO1
H
L
L
CO2
H
H
L
H
CO3
H
H
L
L
CO4
H
L
H
CO5
H
H
CO6
H
H
L
L
M
L
M
CO7
H
L
H
H
M
CO8
H
M
H
M
L
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASICS, FINITE FIELDS, NUMBER THEORY
Computer Security concepts OSI security architecture Security attacks Security services
Security mechanism Network security model Divisibility and the Division Algorithm The
Euclidean Algorithm Modular Arithmetic Groups, Rings and Fields Polynomial Arithmetic
Finite field forms Finite field arithmetic Prime numbers Fermats and Eulers theorems
Testing for primality The Chinese Remainder Theorem Discrete Logarithms
SYMMETRIC CIPHERS
Symmetric cipher model Block cipher structure The Data Encryption Standard (DES) A
DES example The strength of DES Differential and Linear cryptanalysis Block cipher design
principles AES structure AES transformation functions AES key expansion AES
implementation Simplified AES Multiple encryption and Triple DES Electronic Code Book
Cipher Block chaining mode Cipher Feedback mode Output feedback mode Counter mode
XTS-AES mode Principles of Pseudo Random Generator Pseudo Random Number
Generator Stream Ciphers RC4 True Random Number Generators
ASYMMETRIC CIPHERS
Principles of Public Key Cryptosystems The RSA Algorithm Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange
Elgamal Cryptographic System Elliptic Curve Algorithm Elliptic Curve Cryptography
DATA INTEGRITY ALGORITHMS
Cryptographic functions and its applications Two Simple Hash functions Requirements and
Security SHA SHA 3 Message Authentication Requirements Message Authentication
functions Message Authentication codes requirements Security of MACs Authenticated
Department of ECE
126
Encryption Key wrapping Digital Signatures Elliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm RSA-PSS Digital Signature Algorithm
NETWORK AND INTERNET SECURITY, LEGAL ETHICAL ISSUES
Network access control Extensible authentication protocol - IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Network
Access Control Cloud computing Cloud security risks and counter measures Data protection
in the cloud Cloud security as a service Wireless security Mobile device security IEEE
802.11i Wireless LAN Security Cyber crime and computer crime Intellectual Property
Privacy Ethical issues
TEXTBOOK
1.
William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice, 6 th
Edition, 2013
L
T
P
C
HIGH SPEED SWITCHING
ARCHITECTURE
3
0
0
3
Objective(s)
To gain a good exposure on the concepts of switching architecture.
To acquire familiarity with the various switching technologies and their
functions.
To study the construction of Blocking, Non-Blocking and Recursive
Networks.
To acquire a comprehensive idea on the methods of performance analysis
of queued switches
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course the student should be able to:
Explain the various high speed networks for broadband data transfer
CO2
Analyse various switching technologies in High speed networks.
CO
CO1
H
H
L
CO2
H
H
L
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
HIGH SPEED NETWORK
LAN and WAN network evolution through ISDN to BISDN - Transfer mode and control of
BISDN - SDH multiplexing structure - ATM standard; ATM adaptation layers.
LAN SWITCHING TECHNOLOGY
Switching concepts; Switch forwarding techniques; switch path control - LAN switching; cut
through forwarding; store and forward - virtual LANs.
ATM SWITCHING ARCHITECTURE
Switch models - Blocking networks basic and enhanced banyan networks - sorting networks
merge sorting - rearrangeable networks - full and partial connection networks non-blocking
networks recursive network construction and comparison of non-blocking network -switches
with deflection routing shuffle switch - tandem banyan.
ECE435
Department of ECE
127
QUEUES IN ATM SWITCHES
Internal queuing Input, output and shared queuing - multiple queuing networks combined input,
output and shared queuing performance analysis of queued switches
IP SWITCHING
Addressing mode - IP switching types-flow driven and topology driven solutions - IP over ATM
address and next hop resolution multicasting - Ipv6 over ATM.
REFERENCES
1.
Achille Patavina, Switching Theory Architectures and performance in Broadband ATM
Networks. John Wiley & Sons Ltd., New York, 1998
2.
Christopher Y Metz, Switching protocols & Architectures. McGraw Hill, New York, 1998
3.
Ranier Handel, Manfred N Huber, Stefan Schrodder. ATM Networks-concepts, protocols,
applications, 3rd Edition, Adisson Wesley, New York, 1999
4.
John A. Chiong, Internetworking ATM for the internet and enterprise networks, McGraw
Hill, 1998
ECE436
DSP ARCHITECTURE
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) The main Objective(s) of the course is to design architecture for digital signal
processing, with accent on the architecture of processors for digital signal
processing and their programming.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the fundamentals of fixed and floating point architectures of various DSPs
CO2
Apply instruction sets of fixed and floating point DSPs
CO3
Infer about the control instructions, interrupts and pipeline operations
CO4
Illustrate the features of on-chip peripheral devices and its interfacing
CO5
Design and implement signal processing modules in DSPs as mini-project
CO
CO1
H
H
M
CO2
H
H
H
H
M
CO3
H
M
M
L
CO4
H
M
M
L
CO5
H
H
H
H
M
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
DSP ALGORITHMS AND APPLICATIONS
Overview of DSP Systems-Computational characteristics of DSP algorithms and applicationstheir influence on defining a generic instruction-set architecture for DSPs
ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENT OF DSPs
Basic architectural features-High throughput, low cost, low power, small code size, embedded
applications, Techniques for enhancing computational throughput parallelism and pipelining
Department of ECE
128
DATA-PATH OF DSPs
Multiple on-chip memories and buses, dedicated address generator units, specialized processing
units (hardware multiplier, ALU, shifter) and on-chip peripherals for communication and control
CONTROL-UNIT OF DSPs
Pipelined instruction execution, specialized hardware for zero-overhead looping, interrupts.
FIXED-POINT AND FLOATING POINT DSPs
Brief description of TMS320 C5x /C54x/C3x DSPs- Programmers model - Architecture of
Analog Devices fixed-point and floating-point DSPs- brief description of ADSP 218x / 2106x
DSPs- Programmers model. Advanced DSPs- TIs TMS 320C6x, ADIs Tiger-SHARC, Lucent
Technologies DSP 16000VLIW processors - Applications - a few case studies of application of
DSPs in communication and multimedia
REFERENCES
1. Pirsch. P., Architectures for Digital Signal Processing, John Wiley, 1999
2. Higgins. R. J., Digital Signal Processing in VLSI, Prentice-Hall, 1990
3. Texas Instruments TMSC5x, C54x and C6x Users Manuals, Analog Devices ADSP 2100
-family and 2106x-family Users Manuals
4. Parhi. K., VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems, John Wiley, 1999
5. Parhi. K. and Nishitani. T., Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Systems, Marcel
Dekker, 1999
6. B. Venkataramani, M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors, TMH, 2002
ECE437
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) The main Objective(s)s of this course are:
Understand the concepts of the advanced microprocessors. Study advanced
architecture topics in real processors. Interface memory and peripherals to
advanced processors. Design advanced microprocessor systems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain programmable interface devices, programmable peripheral devices and
parallel communication.
CO2
Apply the programming techniques in developing the assembly language program
for microprocessor application.
CO3
Explain the different Micro architectures and their operation
CO4
Create the memory interfacing techniques with processors.
CO5
Describe interrupt vectors, interrupt process, interrupt priorities, external and
advanced interrupts
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
M
M
L
M
CO3
H
L
H
M
CO4
H
L
CO5
M
M
Department of ECE
129
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
MICROPROCESSORS REVIEW, ADDRESSING MODES
Internal microprocessor architecture Real mode memory addressing Introduction to protected
mode memory addressing Memory paging Flat mode memory Data addressing modes
Program memory addressing modes Stack memory addressing modes
INSTRUCTIONS, MEMORY
MOV PUSH/POP Load effective address String Data transfers Miscellaneous data transfer
instructions Segment override prefix Assembler detail Addition, subtraction, comparison
Instructions Multiplication and division Instructions BCD, ASCII Arithmetic Instructions
Basic logic instructions Shift and rotate String compare Jump instructions Flow control
instructions Procedures Introduction to Interrupts Machine control and miscellaneous
instructions Memory devices Address decoding Pentium through Core2 Memory interface
64-Bit Memory Interface Dynamic RAM
INTERFACES, INTERRUPTS, MMX and SIMD
Introduction to I/O interface I/O Port address decoding PPI Programmable Communication
Interfaces Basic DMA definitions DMA controller Shared-Bus operation ISA Bus PCI
Bus USB AGP Basic interrupt processing Hardware Programme Interrupts Arithmetic
coprocessor and its instruction set Introduction to MMX, SIMD technologies
MICROARCHTIECTURES
MIPS architectures Single-cycle processors Multi-cycle processors Pipelined processor
Exceptions Advanced micro architecture Methods to measure microprocessor performance
UNIVERSAL MICROPROCESSORS
Structure of the universal microprocessor market x86 Architecture Processors: Pentium 4, IA64, x86-64 (Intel core i3/i5/i7), AMD processors, NexGen Processors, Cyrix Processor, Transmeta
processor Alpha architecture processors SPARC architecture processors Power and Power
PC architectures
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Barry B. Brey, The Intel Microprocessors: 8086/8088, 80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486,
Pentium, Pentium Pro Processor, Pentium II, Pentium III, Pentium 4, and Core2 with 64bit Extensions, Pearson India, 8th Edition, 2009
2.
Korneev V., Modern Microprocessors, Dreamtech Press/ Charles River Media, 3rd Edition,
2005
3.
David Harris, Sarah Harris, Digital Design and Computer Architecture, Morgan
Kaufmann/Elsevier, 2nd Edition, 2013
Department of ECE
130
ECE438
LOW POWER VLSI DESIGN
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE210, ECE285,ECE309

Objective(s)
1. To understand different sources of power dissipation in CMOS & MIS structure.

2. To understand the different types of low power adders and multipliers
3. To gain knowledge on low power static RAM architecture & the source of power
dissipation in SRAM
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, student must able to
Analyse the needs, sources, limits techniques and principles of physics behind
power dissipation and leakage power reduction leading to efficient power design
in MOSFETs and CMOS
CO2
Describe power techniques that lead to power analysis for SRAM architecture and
CMOS systems
CO3
Explain the techniques for the synthesis of low power software designs and low
power voltage adders, multipliers, memories with other applications
CO
CO1
H
H
M
L
L
M
CO2
H
H
M
CO3
L
L
L
M
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
POWER DISSIPATION
Need for Low power design, Sources of power dissipation, Physics of power dissipation in
MOSFETs, Power dissipation in CMOS, CMOS leakage current, Design for Low power
dissipation, Basic principles of low power design, Circuit techniques for leakage power reduction,
Low power design limits
POWER ESTIMATION
Simulation power analysis, Probabilistic power analysis, Power estimation Circuit, Logic
DESIGN OF LOW POWER CIRCUITS
Design and test of low voltage CMOS circuits, Special techniques, Low power SRAM
architectures, Architecture and systems, Advanced Techniques
SYNTHESIS, SOFTWARE DESIGN FOR LOW POWER
Synthesis for low power, Low energy computing using energy recovery techniques, Software
design for low power
LOW POWER SYSTEM DESIGN
Low voltage low power adders, Low voltage low power multipliers, Low-Voltage Low-Power
Read-Only Memories, Large Low-Power VLSI System Design and Applications
REFERENCES
1.
Gary K. Yeap, Practical low power digital VLSI design, Springer, 2002
2.
K. Seng Yeo, Kaushik Roy, Low Voltage, Low Power VLSI Subsystems, TMH, 2009
3.
Kaushik Roy, Sharat Prasad, Low-Power CMOS VLSI Circuit Design, Wiley, 2000
Department of ECE
131
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
MEC103,
CIV101,
PHY132,
ECE209,
ECE210,
ECE285,
ECE309,
ECE404
Prerequisite
Objective(s) The main Objective(s) of the course is have a basic knowledge about state-of-theart RF MEMS including technology, device architecture, design and modelling,
scalability, figures of merit and RF IC novel functionality and performance.
Reliability and packaging will be discussed as key issues for industrial
applications.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Identify simple linear and non-linear mechanical, electromagnetic and
electromechanical models of RF MEMS structures.
CO2
Interpret the various components of RF MEMS technology
CO3
Design practical RF MEMS devices using analytical and numerical techniques.
CO4
Design high-performance circuits and sub-systems using RF MEMS components.
CO5
Apply the RF MEMS technology in wireless applications.
CO
CO1
H
M
L
CO2
M
L
L
CO3
H
M
M
L
CO4
H
M
M
L
CO5
H
M
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
SWITCHING
RF MEMS relays and switches Switch parameters, Actuation mechanisms, Bistable relays and
micro actuators, Dynamics of switching operation.
MEMS Inductors and capacitors
MEMS inductors and capacitors Micro machined inductor, Effect of inductor layout, Modelling
and design issues of planar inductor, Gap tuning and area tuning capacitors, Dielectric tuneable
capacitors.
COMPONENTS
MEMS phase shifters Types. Limitations, Switched delay lines, Micro-machined transmission
lines, coplanar lines, Micro-machined directional coupler and mixer.
FILTERS
Micro-machined RF filters Modelling of mechanical filters, Electrostatic comb drive,
Micromechanical filters using comb drives, Electrostatic coupled beam structures.
ANTENNAS
Micro-machined antennas Micro-strip antennas design parameters, Micromachining to improve
performance, Reconfigurable antennas.REFERENCES
1.
V. K. Varadan etal, RF MEMS and their Applications, Wiley, 2003
ECE439
Department of ECE
RF MEMS
132
2.
3.
H. J. Delos Santos, RF MEMS circuit Design for Wireless Communications, Artech

House, 2002
G. M. Rebeiz, RF MEMS Theory, Design and Technology, Wiley, 2003
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite CIV101, PHY132, ECE209, ECE210, ECE285, ECE309, ECE404
Objective(s) The main Objective(s) of the course is to give introduction about the analysis,
design and simulation of radio frequency circuits and components for
communication systems and industrial applications.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Demonstrate the knowledge of general RF circuits, components and Systems
CO2
Interpret about the principles of resonant circuits
CO3
Design impedance matching networks and passive RF filters
CO4
Demonstrate about the workings of RF power amplifiers
CO5
Apply RF design tool in RF circuit design
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
H
L
CO4
M
L
L
L
CO5
M
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMS
Wire Resistors Capacitors Inductors Toroids Toroidal Inductor Design Practical
Winding Hints
RESONANT CIRCUITS, FILTER DESIGN, IMPEDANCE MATCHING
Resonance (Lossless Components) Loaded Q Insertion Loss Impedance Transformation
Coupling of Resonant Circuits -Modern Filter Design Normalization and the Low-Pass
Prototype Filter Types Frequency and Impedance Scaling High-Pass Filter Design The
Dual Network Band pass Filter Design Summary of the Band pass Filter Design Procedure
Band-Rejection Filter Design The Effects of Finite Q-The L Network Dealing With Complex
Loads Three-Element Matching Low-Q or Wideband-Matching Networks The Smith Chart
Impedance Matching on the Smith Chart Software Design Tools
TRANSISTOR AT RADIO FREQUENCIES, SMALL-SIGNAL RF AMPLIFIER DESIGN
RF (LARGE SIGNAL) POWER
Amplifiers-RF Transistor Materials The Transistor Equivalent Circuit Y Parameters S
Parameters Understanding RF Transistor Data Sheets Transistor Biasing Design Using Y
Parameters Design Using S Parameters-RF Power Transistor Characteristics Transistor
ECE440
RF CIRCUIT DESIGN
Department of ECE
133
Biasing RF Semiconductor Devices Power Amplifier Design Matching to Coaxial Feed lines
Automatic Shutdown Circuitry Broadband Transformers Practical Winding Hints
RF FRONT-END DESIGN
Higher Levels of Integration Basic Receiver Architectures ADCS Effect on Front-End Design
Software Defined Radios Case StudyModern Communication Receiver
RF DESIGN TOOLS
Design Tool Basics Design Languages RFIC Design Flow RFIC Design Flow Example
Simulation Examples Modelling PCB Design Packaging
REFERENCES
1.
Chris Bowick, RF Circuit Design, Elsevier, 2nd Edition,2014
2.
Behzad Razavi, RF Microelectronics, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2011
3.
Thomas H. Lee, Design of CMOS Radio-Frequency Integrated Circuits, Cambridge
University Press, 2003
L
T
P
C
WAVELETS AND MULTI RESOLUTION
PROCESSING
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite MAT103, MAT202, ECE206, ECE210, ECE285, ECE301 ECE309
Objective(s) The Objective(s) of this course is to introduce students the theory of wavelets and
its applications in signal processing; and demonstrate, in a practical setting, how
wavelets are applied to analyse and compress digital signals.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Demonstrate the fundamentals of wavelets
CO2
Explain the definition and properties of multi resolution analysis
CO3
Characterize continuous and discrete wavelet transforms
CO4
Apply the various Image compression algorithms used in different fields.
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
H
L
CO4
H
H
M
M
M
L
L
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
FUNDAMENTALS
Vector Spaces Properties Dot Product Basis Dimension, Orthogonality and Orthonormality
Relationship between Vectors and Signals Signal Spaces Concept of Convergence Hilbert
Spaces for Energy Signals Generalised Fourier Expansion
MULTI RESOLUTION ANALYSIS
Definition of Multi Resolution Analysis (MRA) Haar Basis Construction of General
Orthonormal MRA Wavelet Basis for MRA Continuous Time MRA Interpretation for the
DTWT Discrete Time MRA Basis Functions for the DTWT PRQMF Filter Banks.
CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORMS
ECE441
Department of ECE
134
Wavelet Transform Definition and Properties Concept of Scale and its Relation with
Frequency Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT) Scaling Function and Wavelet Functions
(Daubechies Coiflet, Mexican Hat, Sinc, Gaussian, Bi Orthogonal) Tiling of Time Scale Plane
for CWT
DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORM
Filter Bank and Sub Band Coding Principles Wavelet Filters Inverse DWT Computation by
Filter Banks Basic Properties of Filter Coefficients Choice of Wavelet Function Coefficients
Derivations of Daubechies Wavelets Mallat's Algorithm for DWT Multi Band Wavelet
Transforms Lifting Scheme Wavelet Transform Using Polyphase Matrix Factorization
Geometrical Foundations of Lifting Scheme Lifting Scheme in Z Domain
APPLICATIONS
Signal Compression Image Compression Techniques EZWSPHIT Coding Image DeNoising
Techniques Noise Estimation Shrinkage Rules Shrinkage Functions Edge Detection and
Object Isolation, Image Fusion, and Object Detection Curve and Surface Editing Variation
Modelling and Finite Element Method Using Wavelets
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Rao R M and A S Bopardikar, Wavelet Transforms Introduction to theory and
Applications, Pearson, 2000
2.
Strang Q Nguyen T, Wavelets and Filter Banks, Wellesley Cambridge Press, 1996
REFERENCES
1.
K P Soman and K I Ramachandran, Insight into Wavelets from Theory to practice, Prentice
Hall, 2010
2.
Vetterli M Kovacevic J, Wavelets and Sub band Coding, PHI, 1995
3.
Mallat S, Wavelet Signal Processing, Academic Press, 2008
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite MAT103, MAT104, MAT202, MAT215, ECE210, ECE285, ECE309
Objective(s) The Objective(s) of this course is to familiarize the participants with principles,
applications, and limitations of the various techniques in Reliability Engineering.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Interpret the relationship of key concepts in reliability engineering and application
to maintenance strategies in a manufacturing environment
CO2
Apply the appropriate methodologies and tools for enhancing the inherent and
actual reliability of components and systems, taking into consideration cost
aspects;
CO3
Establish maintenance strategies according to system characteristics and design
transition programs to implement these strategies;
CO4
Manage the manufacturing organisation with highest possible availability.
CO
CO1
H
H
L
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
H
H
L
CO4
H
H
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
ECE442
Department of ECE
RELIABILITY ENGINEERING
135
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION
Definition; Probability Concept; Addition of Probabilities; Complimentary Events; Kolmogorov
Axioms, Conditional Probability, Multiplication Rule, Independent Events, Venn Diagram, Bayes
Theorem
FAILURE DATA ANALYSIS & HAZARD MODELS
Introduction, Mean Failure Rate, Mean Time to Failure ( MTTF ), Mean Time between Failures (
MTBF), Graphical Plots, MTTF in terms of Failure Density, MTTF in Integral Form, Hazard
Models - Introduction, Constant Hazard; Linearly Increasing Hazard, Weibull Model, Density
Function and Distribution Function, Reliability Analysis, Important Distributions and their Choice
SYSTEM RELIABILITY
Series, Parallel and Mixed Configurations, Complex Systems, Logic Diagrams, Fault- Tree
Analysis and Other Techniques Fault-tree Construction, Calculation of Reliability, Tie- set and
Minimal Tie-set, Markov Models
RELIABILITY IMPROVEMENT & REPAIRABLE SYSTEMS
Redundancy, Element, Unit and Standby Redundancy, Optimization; Reliability cost tradeoff,
Introduction to Repairable Systems, Instantaneous Repair Rate, MTTR, Important Applications
MAINTAINABILITY AND AVAILABILITY
Introduction, Reliability and Availability Functions, Types of availability and factors affecting it,
Maintenance Planning, Reliability and Maintainability trade off
TEXT BOOKS
1.
L. S. Srinath, Reliability Engineering, Affiliated East-West Press , 2002
2.
A. K. Govil, Reliability Engineering, TMH , 1983
REFERENCES
1.
L. Balagurusamy, Reliability Engineering, TMH, 1984
2.
S. Rao, Reliability Based Design, TMH, 1992
ECE443
WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) The Objective(s) of this course is to teach the general principles of wireless sensor
networks, and the state of the art in information processing in wireless sensor
networks.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Demonstrate familiarity with common wireless sensor node architectures.
CO2
Illustrate knowledge of MAC and routing protocols developed for WSN.
CO3
Emphasize the importance of time synchronization and localization of WSN.
CO4
Interpret the operating system developed for WSN.
CO
CO1
H
H
H
M
L
L
CO2
H
H
L
CO3
H
H
CO4
H
L
Department of ECE
136
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION AND ARCHITECTURES
Challenges for WSNs - Why are sensor networks different - Types of applications - Single node
architecture -Hardware components - Energy consumption of sensor nodes - Operating systems
and execution environments - Design principles for WSNs - Service interfaces of WSNs Gateway concepts.
PHYSICAL LAYER AND LINK LAYER
Wireless channel and communication fundamentals - Physical layer & transceiver design
considerations in WSNs - Contention-based protocols - Schedule-based protocols - The IEEE
802.15.4 MAC protocol - Error control Framing - Link management.
ADDRESSING AND TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
Fundamentals - Address and name management in wireless sensor networks - Assignment of
MAC addresses - Distributed assignment of locally unique addresses -Content-based and
geographic addressing - Introduction to the time synchronization problem - Protocols based on
sender/receiver synchronization - Protocols based on receiver/receiver synchronization.
ROUTING PROTOCOLS AND LOCALIZATION
Gossiping and agent-based unicast forwarding - Energy-efficient unicast - Broadcast and multicast
- Geographic routing - Data-centric routing - Data aggregation Single- hop localization, Multi
hop localization Properties of positioning.
OPERATING SYSTEMS AND SECURITY FOR WSNS
Tiny OS Security issues and challenges Various attacks and Defences Secure routing.
TEXT BOOK
1.
Holger Karl, Andreas Willing, Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks,
Wiley, 2005
REFERENCE
Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, Wireless Sensor Networks An information processing
approach, Elsevier, 2005
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite ECE210, ECE306, ECE307, ECE309, ECE322, ECE325, ECE436,
Objective(s) The Objective(s) of this course is to teach
The basics of air craft systems, structures and components
To expose to the avionics and aerospace industry
To Understand the applicability aspects in aircraft design
To acquire the knowledge to design the aircraft structures
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Demonstrate knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices in avionics
CO2
Interpret the architecture avionic system and its components
CO3
Demonstrate the real time applications of avionics
ECE444
Department of ECE
AVIONICS
137
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
L
L
L
CO3
H
H
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION TO AVIONICS
Need for Avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems Integrated Avionics system
Typical avionics sub systems Design approaches and recent advances - Application
Technologies.
PRINCIPLES OF DIGITAL SYSTEMS
Digital Computers Digital number system- number systems and codes-Fundamentals of logic
and combinational logic circuits Digital arithmetic interfacing with analogue systems Microprocessors Memories.DIGITAL AVIONICS ARCHITECTURE
Avionics system architecture salient features and applications of Data buses MILSTD 1553
BARINC 429ARINC 629.
FLIGHT DECK AND COCKPITS
Control and display technologies CRT, LED, LCD, EL and plasma panel - Touch screen -Direct
voice input (DVI) - Civil cockpit and military cockpit MFDS, HUD, MFK, HOTAS 63
AVIONICS SYSTEMS
Communication Systems - Navigation systems - Flight control systems - Radar electronic
warfare - Utility systems Reliability and maintainability - Certification.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Malcrno A.P. and Leach, D.P., Digital Principles and Application, Tata McGraw-Hill,
1990.
2. Gaonkar, R.S., Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Application, Wileyand
Sons Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. Middleton, D.H., Ed., Avionics Systems, Longman Scientific and Technical, Longman
Group UK Ltd., England, 1989.
2. Spitzer, C.R., Digital Avionic Systems, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., USA., 2000.
3. Brain Kendal, Manual of Avionics, The English Book House, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 1993.
L
T
3
0
Prerequisite ECE210, ECE283, ECE285, ECE211, ECE309, ECE323, ECE343
Objective(s)
An introduction to verification of IC design
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Analyze the need for IC verification
CO2
Explain the concepts of various verification approaches
ECE445
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT VERIFICATION
Department of ECE
P
0
C
3
138
CO
CO1
H
L
L
L
L
L
CO2
H
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
AN INTRODUCTION TO IC VERIFICATION
Importance of Verification, Equivalence Checking, Model Checking, Functional Verification,
Formal Verification, Emulation & Acceleration, Factors in Successful verification, Testing Versus
Verification, Design and Verification Reuse, The Cost of Verification
VERIFICATION APPROACHES
Block box approach, White box approach & Grey box approach, Block level verification, Sub
system verification, Full chip verification & System level verification, Instruction driven
verification, Random Testing, Transaction based Verification, Golden Model Approach, Pre-Post
processing approach, Assertion based Verification.
VERIFICATION TECHNOLOGIES
Linting, Simulation, Code & Functional Coverage, Assertions, Metrics, The Verification Plan,
Role of the Verification Plan, Levels of Verification, Verification Strategies, Verifying the
Response, From Specification to Features, Directed Test benches Approach, Coverage-Driven
Random-Based Approach
STIMULUS AND RESPONSE
Reference Signals, Simple Stimulus, Simple Output, Complex Stimulus, Bus-Functional Models,
Response Monitors, Transaction-Level Interface
Architecting Test benches: Verification Harness, Design Configuration, Self-Checking Test
benches, Directed Stimulus, Random Stimulus, System-Level Verification Harnesses, Transaction
Level Models
REGRESSION
The Regression process (Block & Chip Level), Running Regressions, Regression Management,
Coverage in regressions, Verification signoff process, Metrics in regression, Functional &
Structural Coverage metrics, Assertion Verification metrics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Effective functional verification: principles and processes By Srivatsa Vasudevan
Published by Springer, 2006 - ISBN 0387286012, 9780387286013
2. Writing test benches: functional verification of HDL models By Janick Bergeron Edition:
2, illustrated Published by Springer, 2003 ISBN 1402074018, 9781402074011
REFERENCES:
1. Verilog digital system design: RT level synthesis, test bench, and verification By
Zainalabedin Navabi Edition: 2, illustrated Published by McGraw-Hill Professional, 2005
ISBN 0071445641, 9780071445641
2. Writing test benches using System Verilog By Janick Bergeron Edition: illustrated
Published by Birkhuser, 2006 ISBN 0387292217, 9780387292212
Department of ECE
139
ECE446
RFID AND APPLICATIONS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) Radio frequency identification (RFID) information systems provide information to
users about objects with RFID tags. They require the application of information
systems security (INFOSEC) to protect the information from tampering,
unauthorized information disclosure, and denial of service to authorized users.
This course addresses security and privacy in an RFID system.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the basic components and applications of RFID systems
CO2
Analyze and characterize RFID reader architectures
CO3
Analyze various antennas and protocols used in RFID systems
CO4
Apply basic concepts of error correcting coding techniques in RFID systems
CO5
Apply the reasoning informed by knowledge of RFID standards to asses society,
legal issues
CO
CO1
H
L
CO2
H
L
L
L
CO3
H
L
L
L
L
CO4
M
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
CO5
H
H
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION
History and Practice of RFID, RFID Systems and Terminology, Types of RFID, Frequency Bands
for RFID, Tags-Passive, Semi passive, and Active Tags. Radio Basics For UHF RFID -Signal
Voltage and Power, Information, Modulation, and Multiplexing, Backscatter Radio Links, Link
Budgets, Effect of Antenna Gain and Polarization on Range ,Propagation in the Real World
READERS & TAGS
UHF RFID Readers: A Radios Days (and nights), Radio Architectures and Components, RFID
Transmitters and RFID Receivers, Digital-Analog Conversion and Signal Processing Packaging
and Power
UHF RFID Tags: Power and Powerlessness, RF to DC , Getting Data, Talking Back, Tag IC
Overall Design Challenges, Packaging
RFID ANTENNAS
Department of ECE
140
Reader Antennas: Properties of Antenna, Fundamentals of Antenna Operation ,Antennas for
Fixed Readers, Antennas for Handheld or Portable Readers, Near-eld Antennas, Cables and
Connectors, An Electrons Eyelash
Tag Antennas: Practical challenges of Tag antenna, Impedance Matching and Power Transfer,
Dipoles and Derivatives, Tags and the (local) Environment, Near-eld and Hybrid Tag Antennas
RFID PROTOCOLS
Introduction, EPC global Generation 1-EPCglobal Class 0, EPC global Class 1 Generation 1 ,ISO
18000-6B (Intellitag) ,ISO 18000-6C (EPC global Class 1 Generation 2)
RFID SECURITY, STANDARDS AND APPLICATIONS
RFID Security: Confidentiality, Integrity, Availability, Threats, Cryptography, and Threat
Modelling
RFID Standards, Laws, Regulations, Policies, and Guidelines: EPC global, ISO/IEC Item
Management, Contactless Smart Cards, Animal Identification, FCC Rules for ISM Band, Identity
Standards, and Guidelines for Securing RFID Systems
REFERENCES
1. Daniel M. Dobkin, The RF in RFID: passive UHF RFID in practice, Oxford, UK: Elsevier, 2008. ISBN:
978-0-7506-8209-1. Website: http://rfidsecurity.uark.edu
EEE355
SOFT COMPUTING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite CSE255, MAT215

Objective(s) The Objective(s) of this course is to teach basic neural networks, fuzzy systems,
and optimization algorithms concepts and their relations.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Classify and explain various artificial neural networks
CO2
Explain about fuzzy sets and operations
CO3
Apply the fundamental genetic algorithm operators and procedure
CO4
Classify and explain various hybrid systems
CO5
Describe the key components of artificial intelligence
CO
L
CO1
L
CO2
L
H
M
L
M
CO3
L
CO4
H
M
H
CO5
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Department of ECE
141
Course Topic(s)
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS
Basic concepts - Single Layer Perceptron- Multilayer Perceptron - Supervised and Unsupervised
learning Back propagation networks - Kohenen's self organizing networks - Hopfield network
FUZZY SYSTEMS
Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy reasoning - Fuzzy matrices - Fuzzy functions - Decomposition - Fuzzy
automata and languages - Fuzzy control methods - Fuzzy decision making-Fuzzy logic controller
design.
NEURO - FUZZY MODELLING
Adaptive networks based Fuzzy interface systems - Classification and Regression Trees - Data
clustering algorithms - Rule based structure identification - Neuro-Fuzzy controls
GENETIC ALGORITHMS
GA technology-Steady state algorithm-Survival of the Fittest Fitness function- Fitness
Computations - Cross over - Mutation -Reproduction - Rank method - Rank space method-Hybrid
genetic-genetic encoding-GA Vs Conventional algorithm.
SOFT COMPUTING AND CONVENTIONAL AI
AI search algorithm - Predicate calculus - Rules of inference Semantic networks - Frames Objects - Hybrid models - Applications.
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Jang J.S.R., et al., Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft computing, Prentice Hall, 1998
2.
Timothy J.Ross, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, McGraw Hill, 2009
3.
Laurene Fausett, Fundamentals of Neural Networks, Prentice Hall, 2006
REFERENCES
1.
George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic, Prentice Hall, 2003
2.
Nih J.Nelsson, Artificial Intelligence - A New Synthesis, Harcourt Asia Ltd., 1998
3.
D.E .Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Addison
Wesley, N.Y, 1989
EEE365
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite EEE101
Objective(s)
To expose the students to the concepts of DC machines, single phase
transformer and their applications.
To impart industry oriented learning.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Analyse and describe aspects of the construction, principle of operation,
applications, methods of speed control and methods of direction reversal of D.C
machines
CO2
Analyse and describe aspects of the construction and principle of operation of
synchronous machines
CO3
Describe the construction, application and operation of transformers
CO4
Describe the construction, application operation and speed control of induction
motors
Department of ECE
142
CO5
Explain the working and application special machines like stepper motor, universal
motor
CO6
Design an electronic system using appropriate electronic machines studied as a
mini project as per specifications
CO
M
L
CO1
H
L
CO2
H
L
CO3
H
L
CO4
H
L
CO5
L
L
H
H
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
CO6
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
D.C. MACHINES
Constructional details EMF equation Methods of excitation Self and separately excited
generators Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators Principle of operation of
D.C. motor Back EMF and torque equation Characteristics of series, shunt and compound
motors
TRANSFORMERS
Constructional details Principle of operation EMF equation Transformation ratio
Transformer on no load Parameters referred to HV/LV windings Equivalent circuit
Transformer on load Regulation
INDUCTION MOTORS
Construction Types Principle of operation of three phase induction motors Equivalent circuit
- speed control Single phase induction motors
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES
Construction of synchronous machines-Types Induced EMF Voltage regulation- GeneratorLoad Characteristics Synchronous motor
SPECIAL MACHINES
Brushless DC motor Reluctance motor Hysteresis motor Stepper motors-Universal motor
TEXT BOOKS
1. D.P.Kothari and I.J.Nagrath, Basic Electrical Engineering, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2002
2. BL. Theraja and A.K. Theraja, Electrical Technology Volume 2, S.Chand & Co., 2008
REFERENCES
1. S.K.Bhattacharya, Electrical Machines, TMH, 2nd Edition, 1998
2. S.K.Pillai, A First Course on Electrical Drives, New Age International, 2nd Edition, 2002
Department of ECE
143
INT355
INTERNET AND WEB TECHNOLOGY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) To familiarise the students about technologies
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the architecture and protocols of internet and WWW
CO2
Develop a web application incorporating variety of technologies
CO3
Dynamically after the appearance of a web page from the client side and generate
the code for a web page from server side
CO
CO1
H
M
CO2
L
H
M
L
M
CO3
L
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASICS OF NETWORKS
Introduction to Internet and Web Basics of computer networks Topologies signalling
methods Internet and its basics Web servers Browsers Issues for the design of networking
Security issues
WEBSITE AND WEBCASTING TECHNIQUES
Introduction Creation of a website Hyper text and HTML Document structuring tags
Dynamic HTML XML Search Engines Tools Channels Push Technology
JAVA PROGRAMMING
Language basics Java classes constructors Java objects and their creations Interfacing
methods Classes Data encapsulation techniques Java IO
JAVA COMPONENTS / NETWORK PROGRAMMING
Computer Interface Creation of GUI Applets Java Beans CORBA EJBs Network
Programming Socket creation URL classes Socket classes Programming for security
DYNAMIC FUNCTIONALITY IN WEB PAGES
CGI Four steps for CGI Script specification CGI Script languages Dynamic page
functionalities using servlets JSPs ASPs COMs DCOMs
TEXT BOOK
1.
RajKamal, Internet and Web Technologies, TMH, 2005
REFERENCES
2.
Markur Pope, Mastering Internet Programming, Galgotia Publications, 1996
3.
Deitel, Ajax rich internet Application, Pearson publication.
Department of ECE
144
EIE355
ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE208
Objective(s) On completing this subject the student should be able to:
Apply fundamental state-space techniques in the analysis and design of
linear feedback control systems, as they arise in a variety of contexts;
Formulate control engineering problems in terms of optimizing an
Objective(s) function subject to constraints;
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain basic properties of multivariable linear systems, such as multivariable
poles, zeros, system gains and associated critical input and output directions.
CO2
Compute signal norms and system gains, and analyze closed-loop stability using
the small gain theorem.
CO3
Perform a thorough analysis of a closed-loop control system in terms of the critical
transfer functions, including the stability of non-linear system.
CO4
Explain the basic principles behind model-predictive control, including how the
design parameters influence the closed-loop performance and how the basic
problem can be transformed into an associated optimization problem.
CO5
Explain the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems. To provide adequate
knowledge about fuzzy set theory.
CO
H
M
L
CO1
M
L
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
M
CO4
H
M
L
CO5
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Concepts of state variables and state model, State models for Linear Continuous time Systems,
Solution of State Equations, Controllability and Observability, Pole placement by state Feedback,
Observer Systems
SAMPLED - DATA SYSTEMS
Introduction, sampled data systems, closed-loop feedback sampled-data systems, stability analysis
in z-plane, performance of a sampled-data second-order system, closed-loop systems with digital
compensation.
NONLINEAR SYSTEMS
Common physical Nonlinearities- phase plane method- Describing function method- stability
analysis by describing function method- Lyapunovs stability criterion
Department of ECE
145
OPTIMAL CONTROL
Problem formulation, necessary conditions of optimality, state regulator problem, Matrix Riccati
equation, infinite time regulator problem, output regulator and tracking problems, Pontryagins
minimum principles, and time - optimal control problem.
FUZZY CONTROL
Fuzzy sets and linguistic variables - The fuzzy control scheme, Fuzzification and defuzzufication
methods, Applications, Comparison between conventional and fuzzy control
TEXT BOOK
1.
K.Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, PHI, 2010.
REFERENCES
1.
B.C.Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, PHI, 2007
2.
R.Dorf and R.H.Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Addison Wesley, 2001
3.
M.Gopal, Digital Control and State Variable Methods, TMH, 2003
4.
J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control system Engineering, New age International, 2009
5.
B. K. Bose, Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives, Pearson Education, 2010
CSE355
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite CSE255, ECE210

Objective(s) Explore the issues and techniques in Artificial Intelligence
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Solve problems by applying a suitable research method
CO2
Compare Min-Max search an alpha-beta pruning in game playing
CO3
Exhibit strong familiarity with a number of important AI techniques including in
knowledge representation, acquisition and reasoning
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
L
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
PRODUCTION SYSTEMS AND AI
Production systems, search strategies for AI Hill climbing, Backtracking, Graph search, properties
of AO*, monotone restriction, AO* algorithm
PREDICATE CALCULUS
Specialized production systems, searching game trees, min max procedure, alpha beta procedure
- Introduction to predicate calculus - Resolution refutation systems. Answer extraction
Department of ECE
146
REPRESENTATION OF KNOWLEDGE
Basic Plan-Generating System Robot problem solving system - Structured representation of
knowledge Semantic networks, frames, scripts - Dealing with uncertainty, non-monotonic
reasoning
EXPERT SYSTEMS
Introduction to expert systems - Inference Forward chaining and backward chaining - Deduction
process - Languages and tools
KNOWLEDGE ACQUISITION AND UNCERTAINTY
Explanation facilities, knowledge acquisition, dealing with uncertainty, fuzzy reasoning,
Introduction to natural language - Understanding, perception, learning; explanation facilities and
knowledge acquisition
TEXTBOOK
1.
Nilsson N. J , Principles of Artificial Intelligence , Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi,
1990
REFERENCES
1.
Patterson D.W, Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems, Prentice Hall,
New Delhi, 1990.
2.
Rolston D.W, Principles of Artificial Intelligence and Expert systems development,
McGraw Hill, Singapore, 1988
3.
Rich E and Knight K, Artificial Intelligence, 2nd Edition, TMH, New Delhi, 1990
EIE365
MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE201, ECE205 , ECE211

Objective(s) To impart knowledge and understanding of the characteristics and limitations of
biomedical amplifiers for acquisition of electrophysiological signals, and to
demonstrate how these characteristics are derived from an understanding of
electrophysiology, electrode properties and electrical hazards.
To enable students to apply knowledge of stimulators and biomedical amplifiers.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Analyse the source of bio-electric potentials from human body and explain the role
of amplifiers in amplifying them
CO2
Describe different diagnostic and therapeutic medical equipments
CO3
Explain different medical imaging systems
CO
L
H
L
M
CO1
H
M
CO2
L
H
CO3
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
Department of ECE
147
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BIO-ELECTRIC CONCEPTS
Cell and its Structure -Origin of resting and action potential Bioelectric Potentials Electrode
Theory Types of pre amplifiers - Isolation amplifier - Differential amplifier - Instrumentation
amplifier - bridge amplifier - chopper amplifier
PHYSIOLOGY
Electro Physiology of Heart ECG Physiology of Central Nervous System EEG Evoked
Potential Physiology of Eye ERG EMG, Analysis of ECG and EEG Patient monitoring
system.
HEART-LUNG MACHINE
Kidney Machine Nerve Stimulators Short wave Diathermy - Microwave Diathermy Ultrasonic diathermy - Surgical diathermy - anaesthetic monitor
MEDICAL IMAGING
Ultrasonic imaging Radiology- X-rays in tissue- Nuclear medicine, tracing techniques, gamma
camera - Nuclear magnetic imaging- Magnetic Resonance Imaging - Smoothing medical images
- Positron Emission Tomography
MEASURING DEVICES
Measurement of Blood flow Lung Volume Cardiac output Oxygen Saturation of Blood
Blood Cell Counters Flame photometer.
TEXTBOOK
1.
Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology,
Pearson Education, 2001
REFERENCES
1.
Myer Kutz, Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering and Design, McGraw-Hill, 6th
edition, 2012
2.
John G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation Application and Design, John Wiley & Sons,
2007
3.
Khandpur R.S.,Hand book of Biomedical Instrumentation, TMH, 2003
EEE410
NEURAL NETWORK AND FUZZY LOGIC
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite CSE295, MAT215

Objective(s) The main Objective(s) of this course is to provide the student with the basic
understanding of neural networks and fuzzy logic fundamentals, Program the
related algorithms and Design the required and related systems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
To expose the students to the concepts of biological neuro system and
mathematical model of neuro systems.
CO2
To expose the students to the concepts of feed forward neural networks and to
provide adequate knowledge about feedback neural networks.
CO3
To teach about the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems. To provide
adequate
knowledge about fuzzy set theory.
Department of ECE
148
CO4
CO5
Apply neuro-fuzzy model for classification, regression and clustering.

Apply hybrid algorithms to Identify and describe soft computing techniques and
their roles in building intelligent machines in various applications.
CO
H
H
M
CO1
M
L
L
CO2
H
CO3
M
L
CO4
H
L
L
CO5
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS
Overview of biological neuro-system mathematical models of neurons learning rules learning
paradigms supervised unsupervised and reinforcement learning
FEEDFORWARD AND FEEDBACK NETWORKS
Perceptron networks training rules multilayer perceptron back propagation algorithm
associative memories Hopfield networks Boltzmann machine self organizing map
FUZZY LOGIC
Overview of classical sets introduction to fuzzy logic membership function fuzzy rule
generation operations on fuzzy sets compliment intersections unions combinations of
operations fuzzy if-then rule fuzzy inference Mamdani, TSK defuzzification
NEURO FUZZY SYSTEM
Adaptive neuro fuzzy inference systems (ANFIS) architecture hybrid learning algorithm
parameter identification rule base structure identification input selection input space
partitioning neuro-fuzzy control
APPLICATIONS OF NEURAL NETWORK AND FUZZY LOGIC
Applications of neural network pattern recognition fuzzy logic control inverted pendulum
image processing home heating system biomedical applications applications of neuro fuzzy
system character recognition channel equalization noise cancellation
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Jang,J.S.R., Sun.C.T., E.Mizutani., Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing , Prentice Hall of
India (P) Ltd,New Delhi,2005
2.
Timothy J. Ross., Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997
3.
Sivanandam S, Sumathi S, Deepa, Introduction To Neural Networks Using Matlab 6.0 ,
Tata Mgraw Hill,2009
REFERENCES
1.
Laurance Fausett, Englewood cliffs, N.J., Fundamentals of Neural Networks, Pearson
Education, 1992
Department of ECE
149
2.
3.
4.
5.
Zimmermann, H.J., Fuzzy Set Theory & its Applications, Allied Publication Ltd., 1996
John Yen & Reza Langari., Fuzzy Logic Intelligence Control & Information, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2003
Timothy Ross, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Second Edition, John Wiley
& Sons, Ltd, 2004
B.Yegnanarayana,Artificial neural networks,Prentice-hall Of India Pvt Ltd, 2008
EIE409
BIO-MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE201, ECE205 , ECE211

Objective(s) Electrical basis of biological systems and modelling and processing signals.
Understand the canonical structure of biomedical instrumentation systems. Learn
the qualitative functions of the four primary system components (sensors,
actuators, electronics interface, computation unit) .
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Have knowledge about basic cell structure and understanding of the characteristics
and limitations of biomedical amplifiers for acquisition of electrophysiological
signals, and to demonstrate how these characteristics are derived from an
understanding of electrophysiology, electrode properties, and electrical hazards.
CO2
To introduce the concepts of physiology and the Electrical Components of a
Biomedical System and to discuss the measurement of physiological parameters.
CO3
Can describe various Therapeutic Equipments and Surgical Equipments used in
medicine.
CO4
Have knowledge about various devices used in medical field, have the basic
understanding of aware of the safety aspects in this field.
CO5
Explain the basic principles of the major medical imaging techniques and
telemetry.
CO
H
H
CO1
M
L
L
CO2
M
M
CO3
M
L
L
CO4
L
L
CO5
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND TRANSDUCERS
Brief review of human physiology - anatomy cell structures electrical activities - mechanical
activities - chemical activities action potential - resting potential different types of electrodes
sensors used in biomedicine selection criteria for transducers -electrodes necessity for low
Department of ECE
150
noise pre-amplifiers difference amplifiers difference amplifiers chopper amplifiers
electrical safety grounding - isolation
MEASUREMENT OF BIOPOTENTIAL AND PHYSIOLOGICAL PARAMETERS
ECG Phonocardiography Neurophysiology Central nervous system EEG Respiratory
system Muscular system - EMG, -Eye ERG, Physiological Transducers - Measurement of
Blood pressure Blood flow - Cardiac output measurement heart rate respiration rate
measurement of lung volume Oximeters Audiometer
THERAPEUTIC AND SURGICAL EQUIPMENTS
Electro Surgical unit short wave - microwave diathermy Laser surgical unit Anaesthesia
machine Pacemakers Total artificial heart (TAH) Dialyser Heart lung machine
Defibrillators Ventilators Nerve stimulators centralized and Bedside patient monitoring
system Nerve stimulators
BIOMEDICAL EQUIPMENTS AND ELECTRICAL SAFETY
-Flame photometer spectrophotometer chromatography pH, pCO2, analysis sterilizers
Electrical safety hazards in hospitals
IMAGING SYSTEMS AND TELEMETRY
Computerized Tomography (CT) MRI instrumentation Ultrasound scanner X-ray machine
Fluroscopic techniques angiography Cardiac catherisation lab Echo cardiograph vector
cardiograph Biotelemetry
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Kandpur, R.S., Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, TMH, 2003
2.
Richard Aston, Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement, Merrill
publishing company, 1990
REFERENCES
1.
Arumugam, M., Biomedical Instrumentation, Anuradha Agencies, Publishers,
Kumbakonam, 1992
2.
Geddes, L.A. and Baker, L.E.,Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation, John
wiley and Sons, 1989
L
T
P
C
MICRO CONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM
DESIGN
3
0
0
3
Objective(s) To familiarize the students with
To develop an in-depth understanding of the operation of microcontrollers,
machine language programming & interfacing techniques
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Select a microcontroller required an application by using knowledge gained on
architecture of microcontrollers.
CO2
Develop a microcontroller based system by acquiring knowledge on programming
a microcontroller.
CO
CO1
H
L
L
L
EIE415
Department of ECE
151
CO2
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ROLE OF MICRO-CONTROLLERS
Types and selection Application example
MICRO-CONTROLLER RESOURCES
Family members - bus width program - data memory parallel ports - D/A - A/D converters - reset
circuitry - watchdog timers - power down considerations
REAL-TIME CONTROL
Interrupt structures programmable timers - real-time clock latency interrupt - density - interval
constraints
PROGRAMMING FRAMEWORK
CPU register Structure - addressing modes - instruction sets -assembly languages - assemblers
SOFTWARE BUILDING BLOCKS
Queues, tables and strings - program organization - micro controller expansion methods - I/O
hardware alternatives - development tools - Motorola - Intel micro controller details
TEXT BOOKS
1. John B. Peatman, Design with Micro-controllers, McGraw Hill International Ltd., 1989
2. Michael Slater, Microprocessor based design A Comprehensive Guide to Effective
Hardware Design, Prentice Hall, 1989
REFERENCES
1. Yeralan, S. and Ahluwalia.A., Programming and Interfacing the 8051 Micro controller,
Addison Wesley, 1995
2. Intel Manual on 16 bit embedded controllers, 1991
3. Mathivanan. N., Microprocessors, PC hardware and interfacing,Prentice-Hall of India
Private Ltd., 2003
CSE408
GRID COMPUTING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE306
Objective(s) To familiarise students
About high speed links and storage area networks for grid computing to implement
it for real world scenario
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Evaluate enabling technologies such as high-speed links and storage area networks
for building computer grids;
Department of ECE
152
CO2
Utilize grid computing and clustering middleware, such as Parallel Virtual

Machine (PVM), Message Passing Interface (MPI), HPC Portals, and Peer-to-Peer
networks for implementing virtual super computing resources;
CO3
Design a grid computing application in one of the key application areas e.g.
Computer Animation, E-Research;
CO4
Install a grid computing environment;
CO5
Develop communications skills and accept the code of professional conduct and
practice through short presentations and group work.
CO
CO1
H
H
M
CO2
H
H
CO3
H
H
CO4
H
CO5
H
H
H
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
COMPUTING TECHNOLOGY
Cluster Computing Peer to Peer Computing Grid Computing Grid Protocols Types of Grids
Desktop Grids
TYPES OF GRIDS
Cluster Grids Data Grids Data Grid Architecture Open Grid Services Architecture
Implementing OGSA based Grids
GRID SERVICES
Creating and Managing Grid Services Service discovery Operational requirements Tools and
Toolkits Grid Enabling software applications
GRID MANAGEMENT
Managing Grid Environments Managing Grids Management reporting Monitoring Service
level Monitoring Data catalogs and Replica management Portals Grid Enabling Network
Services
RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN GRID
Resource and Service Management Resource Management on the Grid Requirement
Resource Management Framework Grid Resource Management System Service negotiation
and acquisition protocols Building reliable Clients and Services Layers of Grid Computing
TEXT BOOK
1.
Ahmar Abbas, Grid Computing A Practical Guide to technology and Applications, Laxmi
Publications, 2005
REFERENCES
1.
Joshy Joseph and Craig Fellenstein, Grid Computing, PHI, PTR-2003
2.
Janakiram D, Grid computing A Research Monograph, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005
Department of ECE
153
3.
4.
5.
6.
Ian Foster, Carl Kesselman, The Grid Blueprint for a New Computing Infrastructure,
Morgan Kaufmann, 2nd Edition, 2004
Daniel Minoli, A Networking Approach to Grid Computing, Wiley-Inter science, 2004
Paul Barry, Grid Computing for Developers Linux Journal, March 2006
C.S.R.Prabhu, Grid and Cluster computing, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2009
INT315
BLUE TOOTH TECHNOLOGY
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite ECE210
Objective(s) To familiarise students with the following techniques
How one Bluetooth device discovers another Bluetooth device
How Bluetooth devices pair and data transferred between them
How profiles can facilitate communication between devices
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Demonstrate the students about how Bluetooth devices pair set up and the options
concerning discoverability
CO2
Analyze the various kinds of data transfer between Bluetooth devices
CO3
Create trust and security related policies which are handled by Bluetooth.
CO4
Implement profiles like the Headset profile, LAN, OBEX, and Serial port
compatible to specified applications.
CO
CO1
H
H
M
CO2
H
H
M
L
CO3
H
H
M
CO4
H
M
H
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASIC CONCEPTS
Origin- blue tooth SIG - Protocol stack - Security applications and profiles management - test
and qualification technology basics - RF and IR wireless communication
BLUETOOTH MODULE
antennas patterns - gain and losses- types of antennas- on chip antennas radio interference FH, modulation, symbol timing, power emission and control, performance parameters - RF
architecture - Blur RF - Base band - Blue tooth device address system timing - Physical links packet structuring types and construction - channel coding and time base synchronization
LINK CONTROLLER AND MANAGEMENT
Department of ECE
154
LCP- controller states - Pico net and scattered operations - Master / slave role switching LC
Architectural overview LMC, Link set up - Quality of service - LMP version - Name represent
- Test mode
BLUETOOTH HOST
LLC and adaptation protocol L2 cap signalling connections- Blue tooth profiles- Version 1.0Generic profiles-serial and object exchange
SECURITY
Encryption and security Key generation security Modes and architecture - Low power operation
and QOS management
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Jennifer Bray and Stuntman, C.F, Blue tooths Connect without cables. Pearson education
2001
REFERENCES
1.
Brent A.Miller and Bisdikian C, Blue tooth reveeled, Pearson Education 2001
2.
Miller, J., Blue tooth Demystified, Nathan Tata Mc Graw Hill 2001
EIE 315
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) It provides new concepts towards measurement and automation.
It imbibes knowledge about how to control an external measuring device by
interfacing a computer.
To become competent in data acquisition and instrument control.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Identify salient traits of a virtual instrument and incorporate these traits in their
projects.
CO2
Describe graphical programming in data flow.
CO3
Describe VI programming techniques.
CO4
Acquire knowledge on how virtual instrumentation can be applied for dataacquisition and instrument control.
CO5
Experiment, analyse and document in the laboratory prototype measurement
systems using a computer, plug-in DAQ interfaces and bench level instruments.
CO
CO1
H
H
CO2
M
L
CO3
H
H
L
CO4
M
L
L
CO5
H
L
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
Department of ECE
155
REVIEW OF VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
Historical perspective advantages- block diagram - architecture of a virtual instrument
DATA FLOW TECHNIQUES
Graphical programming in data flow- comparison with conventional programming
VI PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES
VIs - sub-VIs - loops charts arrays - clusters graphs - case - sequence structures formula
nodes - local - global variables - string - file I/O
DATA ACQUISITION AND INSTRUMENT INTERFACE
ADC DAC DIO - counters timers - PC hardware structure timing interrupts DMA software - hardware installation - current loop - RS 232/RS485 GPIB - USB - PCMCIA
ANALYSIS TOOLS AND APPLICATION
Some tools from the advanced analysis tools relevant to the discipline may be included e.g. Fourier
transform - power spectrum - correlation methods windowing filtering - VI applications in
various fields visa and ivi image acquisition processing
TEXT BOOKS
1.
Gary Johnson, Lab View graphical programming, McGraw Hill, New York, 2ndedition,
1997
2.
Lisa K. Wells and Jeffrey Travels, Lab View for everyone, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1997
REFERENCES
1.
Gupta, S. and Gupta, J.P., PC interfacing for Data Acquisition & Process Control,
Instrument Society of America, 2ndedition, 1994
2.
Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition Techniques for Measurement,
Instrumentation and Control, Newness, 2000.
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite To understand the safety Techniques followed in industry like a safety
management system, Accident reporting procedures, Human Behaviours,
Occupational hygiene and Industrial safety rules and regulations.
Objective(s) At the end of the course the student will be able to learn the safety practices and
safety standards followed in various manufacturing and automobile industries in
various aspects of studies.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Having successfully completed this course, students should be able to:
Develop an understanding on safety management systems.
CO2
Develop in-depth knowledge of human factors and regulation for health safety
and Environment.
CO
CO1
M
L
L
L
L
H
CO2
H
L
M
M
M
H
MEC416
INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ENGINEERING
Department of ECE
156
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ACCIDENT PREVENTION
Definitions - history of safety movement - ILO NSC BSC LPA - theories and principles of
accident causation - cost of accidents - accident reporting and investigation -safety committee safety suggestion scheme - safety education and training -safety management techniques.
SAFETY MANAGEMENT
Safety systems - safety information system safety control system - hazard and risk analysis
risk assessment methodologies - Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) and Event Tree Analysis (ETA) - total
loss control - risk management.
HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING
Man machine system- human behaviour- principles of ergonomics- factors impeding safety and
personal protective equipment.
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE
Physical hazards - chemical hazards recognition of hazards evaluation control measures occupational health concept and spectrum of health industrial toxicology definitions hazard
toxicity local and systemic effect routes of entry.
SAFETY REGULATION
History of legislations related to safety - factories act and rules - workmen compensation act OSHA standards.
TEXT BOOKS
1.
John V Grimaldi and Rollin H Simonds, Safety management, All India Travelers book
seller, New delhi,1989
2.
Occupational Safety manual, BHEL, 2002
REFERENCES
1.
Frank E. McErloy,P.E; C.S.P, Accident Prevention Manual for IndustrialOperations,NSC
Chicago
2.
Lees F.P, Loss Prevention in Process Industries, Butterworths, New Delhi.
3.
BHEL,Occupational Safety Manual, Tiruchirappalli
4.
Dr. A.K. Gupta, Reliability, Maintenance and Safety Engineering, Laxmi Publications,
New Delhi.
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Prerequisite It is assumed that the student has knowledge about basic calculus and differential
equations.
MEC 320
Department of ECE
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS
157
It is also assumed that the student has some experience with Python (or is willing
to learn)
Objective(s) 1. To equip the students with the Finite Element Analysis fundamentals.
2. To enable the students to formulate the design problems into FEA.
3. To introduce basic aspects of finite element technology, including domain
discretization, polynomial interpolation, application of boundary conditions,
assembly of global arrays, and solution of the resulting algebraic systems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Having successfully completed this course, students should be able to:
Develop element stiffness matrix equation for spring elements & to Assemble
element matrix equations into a global matrix
CO2
Enforce boundary conditions and forces on the system, solve the resulting system
and interpret results
CO3
Develop stiffness matrix for truss (bar) elements
CO4
Develop the concept of local/global coordinate systems and their transformations
CO5
Use the potential energy approach in addition to direct equilibrium method & to
Handle inclined support
CO
CO1
L
H
M
L
L
M
CO2
H
L
M
M
M
CO3
M
M
L
M
CO4
M
M
L
M
M
M
CO5
H
H
L
M
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION
Historical background matrix approach application to the continuum discretisation matrix
algebra Gaussian elimination governing equations for continuum classical techniques in
FEM weighted residual method Ritz method.
ONE DIMESIONAL PROBLEMS
Finite element modelling coordinates and shapes functions- potential energy approach
Galarkin approach assembly of stiffness matrix and load vector finite element equations
Quadratic shape functions applications to plane trusses.
TWO DIMENSIONAL CONTINUUMS
Introduction finite element modelling scalar valued problem Poisson equation Laplace
equation triangular elements element stiffness matrix force vector Galarkin approach stress calculation temperature effects.
Department of ECE
158
AXISYMMETRIC CONTINUUM
Axisymmetric formulation element stiffness matrix and force vector Galarkin approach body
forces and temperature effects stress calculations boundary conditions applications to
cylinders under internal or external pressures rotating discs.
ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS FOR TWO DIMENSIONAL CONTINUUMS
The four node quadrilateral shape functions element stiffness matrix and force vector
numerical integration - stiffness integration stress calculations four node quadrilateral for
axisymmetric problems.
TEXT BOOK
1.
Chandrupatla, T.R., and Belegundu, A.D., Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3rdEdition, 2002
REFERENCES
1.
David V Hutton, Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis, McGraw-Hill Int. Ed., 2004
2.
Rao, S.S., The Finite Element Method in Engineering, Pergammon Press, 1989
3.
Logan, D.L., A First course in the Finite Element Method, Thomson Learning, Third
Edition, 2002
4.
Robert D Cook., David.S, Malkucs Michael E Plesha, Concepts and Applications of Finite
Element Analysis, Wiley, 4th Edition, 2003
5.
Reddy, J.N., Introduction to Finite Element Method, McGraw-Hill International Student
Edition, 1985
HSS001
Total Quality Management
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite HSS101, HSS102 , Basic knowledge in Management

1. Implement the principles and concepts inherent in a Total Quality
Management (TQM) approach to managing a manufacturing or service
organization.
2. Understand the philosophies--including similarities and differences--of the
gurus of TQM in order to better evaluate TQM implementation proposals
offered by quality management organizations and consultants.
3. Successfully implement process improvement teams trained to use the
various quality tools for identifying appropriate process improvements.
4. Assess exactly where an organization stands on quality management with
respect to the ISO 9000 quality management standard and the Baldrige
Award criteria.
5. Develop a strategy for implementing TQM in an organization.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain meaning of TQM and frameworks
CO2
Describe the evolution of TQM
CO3
Identify the features of TQM and philosophy
CO4
Derive tools for identity and solving quality problem
CO5
Apply the knowledge of quality management in their field of use
Department of ECE
159
CO
CO1
H
L
L
CO2
L
L
M
CO3
M
M
L
L
L
L
CO4
H
L
M
H
CO5
M
L
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Definitions TOM framework, benefits, awareness and obstacles. Quality vision, mission and
policy statements. Customer Focus customer perception of quality, Translating needs into
requirements, customer retention. Dimensions of product and service quality. Cost of quality.
PRINCIPLES AND PHILOSOPHIES OF QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Overview of the contributions of Deming, Juran Crosby, Masaaki Imai, Feigenbaum, Ishikawa,
Taguchi, Shingeo and Walter Shewhart. Concepts of Quality circle, Japanese 5S principles and 8D
methodology.
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL AND PROCESS CAPABILITY
Meaning and significance of statistical process control (SPC) construction of control charts for
variables and attributed. Process capability meaning, significance and measurement Six sigma
concepts of process capability. Reliability concepts definitions, reliability in series and parallel,
product life characteristics curve. Business process re-engineering (BPR) principles, applications,
reengineering process, benefits and limitations.
TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES FOR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Quality functions development (QFD) Benefits, Voice of customer, information organization,
House of quality (HOQ), building a HOQ, QFD process. Failure mode effect analysis (FMEA)
requirements of reliability, failure rate, FMEA stages, design, process and documentation.
TAGUCHI TECHNIQUES
Taguchi techniques introduction, loss function, parameter and tolerance design, signal to noise
ratio. Seven old (statistical) tools. Seven new management tools. Bench marking and POKA YOKE.
References:
1. Dale H.Besterfield et al, Total Quality Management, Thrid edition, Perarson Education
(First Indian Reprints 2004).
2. Shridhara Bhat K, Total Quality Management Text and Cases, First Edition 2002,
Himalaya Publishing House.
3. William J.Kolarii, Creating quality, Mcgraw Hill, 1995
4. Poornima M.Charantimath., Total quality management, Pearson Education, First Indian
Reprint 2003.
Department of ECE
160
HSS002
Engineering Management
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite HSS101, HSS102

Objective(s) To familiarise the students with Understanding and functional knowledge of the
following processes:
1. Production Analysis and Plant Location
2. Demand Forecasting and Economic Optimization
3. Business and Coordination
4. Leadership, Team Work and Creativity
5. Product development and Management Techniques
6. Just in time Managerial Ethics and Social Responsibilities
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the Management Techniques in Product Development
CO2
Describe cognitive and affective growth related to ethics and leadership skills and
emotional intelligence.
CO3
Assess team, team member and project performance.
CO4
Explain multinational strategies in Global environment.
CO5
Improve skills in effective communication both Oral and written, especially with
regard to Management issues in Engineering.
CO6
Engage with their peers in public discourse with diversity in culture on ethical
challenges, which serves to inform autonomous choices and manage differing
opinions on complex management scenarios.
CO
CO1
M
H
CO2
L
H
H
L
H
CO3
M
CO4
M
L
M
CO5
L
CO6
L
M
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
DEMAND AND REVENUE ANALYSIS
Introduction - Demand and Revenue Analysis - Demand Forecasting - Production Analysis - Cost
and Supply Analysis, Price and output Determination - Investment Analysis - Plant Location Economic Optimization.
FORMS OF BUSINESS AND FUNCTIONS
Types of Business Organisation, Forms, Planning - Organizing - Designing effective organisations
- Coordination.
Department of ECE
161
HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT
Motivating individuals and workgroups - Leadership for Managerial Effectiveness - Team working
and Creativity - Managerial Communication - Personal Management Time Management - Stores
Management - Career Planning.
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Product development - Management techniques in product development - Nature of controlling Operations Management - Just-in-Time.
GLOBAL ENVIRONMENT
Managing World Economic Change - The global environment - Multinational Strategies Economic Cycles and Director Investment - Change and Organisation Development - Managerial
Ethics and Social responsibilities.
References:
1. Harold Koontz& Heinz Weihrich - Essentials of Management Tata McGraw Hill publishing
company Ltd.
2. Koontz, Weihrich& Aryasri Priniciples of Management Tata McGraw Hill publishing
company Ltd.
3. Tripathi& Reddy - Priniciples of Management Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd.
4. Hampton Management Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd.
5. L.M.Prasad - Principles of Management.
HSS003
Indian Economic Development
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

1. Using appropriate analytical frameworks, this course reviews major
trends in economic indicators
2. Policy debates in India in the Pre and Post-Independence period, with
particular emphasis on paradigm shifts and turning points.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
CO2
CO3
Identify key relevant Indian economic factors and analyze the impact of these economic
factors on businesses.
Explain their interactions with domestic macroeconomic policies.
Develop a perspective that is supported with relevant information and integrative thinking
and draw and assess conclusions

CO
CO1
H
L
M
M
CO2
H
M
H
M
CO3
M
L
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
Department of ECE
162
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INDIAN ECONOMIC SCENARIO
Indian economy before and after Independence: National income trends and compositions.
Sources of capital formation and savings. Sectoral growth. Demographic trends in India and its
effect on economic development. Occupational structure of the labour force.
ECONOMIC PLANNING AND POLICY
Indian Economic Planning, fiscal policy, Monetary Policy, Unemployment in India and other
economic policies
INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT
Industry: Industrial development during the planning period. Industrial policies Industrial licensing
policy MRTP Act, FERA and FEMA. Growth and problems of small-scale industries. Role of
Public sector enterprises in Indias industrialization. Impact of economic reforms on Indian
industrial sector after 1991.
FOREIGN TRADE
External Sector: Role of foreign trade. Trends in exports and imports. Composition and direction of
Indias foreign trade. Balance of payments crisis and the New Economic Reforms Export
promotion measures and the new trade policies. Foreign capital FDI, aid: Multinational
corporations in India
AREAS OF CONCERN
Important Areas of Concern: Poverty and inequality. Unemployment. Rising prices. Industrial
relations. Industrial structure and causes of industrial backwardness.
References:
1. Agrawal, A.N. Indian Economy, Problems of Developmental Planning, Wiley Eastern Ltd.,
Calcutta (latest edition).
2. Ahluwalia, I.J. and I.M.D. Little (eds.) (1999). Indias Economic Reforms and Development:
Essays in honour of Manmohan Singh, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
3. Alam, K. (ed.) (1993). Agricultural Development in North East India: Constraints and
Prospects, Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.
4. Choudhuri, Pramit. (1975). Aspects of Indian Economic Development, Lord George Allen &
Unwin Ltd., London.
5. Dutt, R.C. (1950). The Economic History of India Under Early British Rule, Low Price
Publications, Delhi.
6. Dutt, Ruddar and K.P.M. Sundaram (2001). Indian Economy, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New
Delhi.
Department of ECE
163
HSS004
Industrial Psychology
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Critically evaluate psychological research as well as the popular notions of
human behaviour.
2. Use the primary literature of the field and prepare a clear, organized summary of
a topic.
3. Use computers for the preparation of manuscripts, the analysis of data, and
communication.
1.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply psychological theories and concepts to problems and questions they find
personally important
CO2
Apply psychological theories concepts and principles to personal and broader
social systems and issues
CO3
Recognise and understand the complexity of cultural diversity
CO4
Apply basic methods in psychology
CO
CO1
H
M
M
L
H
CO2
M
L
H
L
L
H
M
CO3
L
M
L
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ROLE OF THE PSYCHOLOGY
The role of the psychologist in industry, The field of occupational Psychology: Study
of
behaviour in work situation and applications of psychological principles to
problems of
selection, placement, counselling and training
DESIGN OF WORK ENVIRONMENTS:
Human engineering and physical environment techniques of job analysis, Social environmentGroup dynamics in Industry Personal psychology: Selection, training, placement, promotion,
counselling, job motivations, job satisfaction.
Special Study of problem of fatigue, boredom and accidents,
UNDERSTANDING CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR
Consumer behaviour; study of consumer preference, effects of advertising, Industrial morale
The nature and scope of engineering psychology, its application to industry.
WORK METHODS
Efficiency at work: the concept of efficiency, the work curve, its characteristics. The work
methods; hours of work, nature of work, fatigue and boredom, rest pauses. The personal factors;
age abilities, interest, job satisfaction The working environment:
noise, illumination,
Department of ECE
164
atmospheric conditions. Increasing efficiency at work; improving the work methods; Time and
motion study, its contribution and failure resistance to
time and motion studies, need for
allowances in time and motion study.
WORK AND EQUIPMENT DESIGN
Criteria in evaluation of job-related factor, job design, human factors, Engineering information,
input processes, mediation processes, action processes, methods design, work space and its
arrangement, human factors in job design. Accident and Safety: The human and economic costs
of accidents, accident record and statistics, the causes of accidents situational and individual
factors related to accident reduction
References:
1. Tiffin,J and McCormic E.J.: Industrial Psychology, (Prentice Hall), 6th Edn., 1975
2. McCormic E.J.: Human Factors engineering and design (McGraw Hill), 4th Edn.,1976
Mair, N.R.F.: Principles of Human relations
3. Gilmer: Industrial Psychology
4. Ghiselli & Brown: Personnel and Industrial Psychology
5. Myer: Industrial Psychology
6. Dunnete, M.D.: Handbook of Industrial and Organizational Psychology
Blum & Taylor: Industrial Psychology
HSS005
Consumer Psychology
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite HSS101, HSS102 , Basics in management

1. To understand current psychological, sociological and anthropological
theories that provide insight into consumer behavior
2. Recognize which theoretical concepts are relevant to a particular decisionmaking
3. context (such as a case study or discussion question), demonstrate clearly
how these principles apply, and provide responses that are supported with
evidence;
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Identify the mental processes that guide consumer perception attitudes memory
and choices
CO2
Analyze how these processes might differ as a consequence of social, cultural
and group influences and apply this knowledge to generate effective marking
tactics
CO3
Provide recommendations if needed for public policy to protect consumer right
CO
CO1
H
H
M
M
H
CO2
H
L
H
L
M
CO3
M
L
L
M
L
M
CO4
M
Department of ECE
165
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR
Introduction Consumer behaviour concepts dimensions of consumer behaviours
application of consumer behaviour knowledge in marketing decisions approaches to the study
of consumer behaviour.
LEARNING AND DECISION MAKING PROCESS
Motivation, ability and opportunity; exposure, attention and perception Categorizing and
comprehending information Attitude formation and change memory and retrieval Process of
decision making psychographics Consumer behaviour outcomes consumer welfare
GROUP BEHAVIOUR
Group dynamics and consumer reference groups Family Social class cultural and sub-cultural
aspects cross cultural consumer behaviour.
INFLUENCE BEHAVIOUR
Personal influence and opinion leadership diffusion of innovations consumer decision
making process models of consumer decision process Nicosia- Howard Sheth and EngelKollat model- post purchase behaviour
CONSUMERISM
Consumer protection difficulties and challenges in predicting consumer behaviour online
consumer behaviour organizational and industrial buyer behaviour consumer behaviour in
Indian context emerging issues.
REFERENCES:
1. David L.Loudon, Albert J Della Bitta, Consumer Behaviour, McGraw Hill, New Delhi
2002.
2. Jay D. Lindquist and M.Joseph sirgy, Shopper, buyer & consumer Behaviour, Theory and
Marketing application, Biztantra Publication, New Delhi 2005.
3. Sheth Mittal, Consumer Behaviour A Managerial Perspective, Thomson Asia (P) Ltd.,
Singapore, 2003.
4. K.K.Srivastava, Consumer Behaviour in Indian Context, Goal Gotia Publishing Co, New
Delhi 2002.
5. S.L. Gupta & Sumitra Pal, Consumer Behaviour an Indian Perspective, Sultan Chand, New
Delhi 2001.
6. Ms.Raju, Dominique Xavedel, Consumer behaviour, Concepts Applications and Cases,
Vikas publishing house (P) Ltd., New Delhi 2004.
HSS006
Professional Ethics
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite HSS101, HSS102, Basics in management

Objective(s) Understanding and functional knowledge of the following processes:
1. To develop understanding of the contemporary ethical issues that engineers
often face in professional practice.
2. To develop the appreciation and the ability to more clearly and deeply about
ethical issues.
Department of ECE
166
3. To understand about codes of ethics.
4. To explore to resources for dealing with professional and personal conflicts.
5. To develop the need for health and safety in the workplace.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Understand the importance of balancing professional and personal commitments
CO2
Appreciate the spirit of team-play in attaining group-specific goals
CO3
Recognize the importance of avoiding conflicts of interest at the workplace
CO4
Cite case-studies for unethical conduct and behavior in corporations and
government organizations
CO5
Explain how ethical theories help in resolving moral dilemmas confronting
professionals
CO6
Describe the dividing line between loyalty to employers and commitments to public
welfare
CO7
Appreciate the need to avoid gender-bias and related discrimination at the
workplace
CO8
Improve skills in effective communication, both oral and written, especially with
regard to ethical and professional issues in engineering.
CO9
Engage with their peers in a public discourse with diversity in culture on ethical
challenges, which serves to inform autonomous choices and manage differing
opinions on complex ethical scenarios.
CO
2
CO1
L
H
M
M
L
CO2
H
M
M
L
CO3
M
L
L
CO4
H
M
CO5
M
M
CO6
H
M
CO7
L
H
L
CO8
H
H
H
CO9
L
M
L
L
L
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ENGINEERING ETHICS
Functions of Being a Manager Stock holder and stakeholder management. Ethical treatment of
employees - ethical treatment of customers- supply chain management and other issues
Department of ECE
167
ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION
Senses of Ethics Variety of moral issues Types of inquiry Moral dilemmas. Moral Autonomy
Kohlbergs theory Gilligans theory Consensus and Controversy Professions and
Professionalism Professional ideals and virtues Theories about right action Self-interest
Customs and religion Use of Ethical Theories
ENGINEER REPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY
Corporate social responsibility. Collegiality and loyalty Respect for Authority Collective
Bargaining Confidentiality Conflicts of Interest Occupational Crime Professional Rights
Employee Rights Discrimination
RESPONSIBILITY AND RIGHTS
Moral imagination, stake holder theory and systems thinking. One approach to management
Decision making Leadership
GLOBAL ISSUES
Multinational Corporations Environmental Ethics Computer Ethics Weapons Development
Engineers as Managers Consulting Engineers Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors
Moral Leadership Sample code of conduct.
REFERENCES:
1.
Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, McGraw Hill, New
York, 1996
2.
Charles D Fledderman, Engineering Ethics, Prentice Hall, New Mexico, 1999.
3.
Laura Schlesinger, How Could You Do That: The Abdication of Character, Courage,
and Conscience, Harper Collins, New York, 1996.
4.
Stephen Carter, Integrity, Basic Books, New York 1996.
5.
Tom Rusk, The Power of Ethical Persuasion: From Conflict to Partnership at Work
and in Private Life, Viking, New York, 1993
HSS007
Operations Management
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

1. Understand the different challenges businesses face when they operate in a
global environment
2. Know the national differences in Political, Economic and Legal systems.
3. Know the various International Trade theories
4. Appreciate the interaction of business and governments as they relate to
international commerce
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
At the end of the course, the students will be able to assess the various cultural,
legal and political issues that impact international business effort.
CO2
Trace investment theory, foreign exchange and the determination of foreign
exchange rates.
CO3
Develop insight into the management implications of international business
strategy and operations.
CO
Department of ECE
168
CO1
CO2
CO3
H
M
L
H
Assessment Tools
H
H
H
M
H
L
H
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATION MANAGEMENT
Production and Operations Management (POM) Need, History, System, Types, functions and
communication in POM.
MATERIAL AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT:
Material Management (MM) Handling Technology (Robots, Automated storage and retrieval
systems (ASRS) and methods (JIT, / Kanban, ABC Systems).
Independent Demand Inventory Models Fixed order system, Basic EOQ, EBQ Models,
Quantity discount models.
Dependent Demand Inventory models MRP and MRP II systems Introduction to ERP, ebusiness and e-operations strategies.
PLANNING AND FORECASTING:
Introduction to Strategic, Tactical, Operational, Aggregate and Capacity Planning. Planning
Product design and development Applications of CAD, CAM, Computer Integrated
Manufacturing.
FORECASTING AND SCHEDULING:
Forecasting Types, Methods (Qualitative and Quantitative), Types of variation in data,
Minimizing forecasting errors and selection of forecasting methods. Johnsons Algorithm for job
sequencing (n job thro 2 machines, n jobs thro 3 machines, n jobs thro m machines and 2 jobs
thro m machines) Use of Gantt charts, Queuing analysis and Critical Ratios as methods for job
scheduling.
FACILITY, LAYOUT LOCATION AND WORK MEASUREMENT
Facility Location Decisions (FLcD) . Facility Layout Decision (FlyD) Types (Fixed Position,
and Production, Process, Flexible), Methodologies (Distance Minimising, Computer software
systems (CRAFT, CORELAP, ALDEP), Line Balancing and performance ratios, work
measurement methods (WM) - Time study, methods-time measurement,
REFERENCES:
1. R.Paneer Selvam, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
2. Sang M Lee and Marc J Schniederjans, Operation Management, All India Publishers and
Distributors, First Indian edition 1997.
3. Robert H. Lowson, Strategic operations Management (The new competitive
advantage),Vikas Publishing House, First Indian reprint 2003.
Department of ECE
169
HSS008
Introduction to Economics
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) To familiarise the students with understanding and functional knowledge of the
1. Explain the behaviour of buyers and sellers in the market using basic
economic theories
2. Explain the role of government in influencing buyer and seller behaviour
in the market
3. Describe basic economic theories that explain economic outcomes of the
aggregate economy
4. Recognize and analyze common economic issues which relate to individual
markets and the aggregate economy
5. Explain economic events in individual markets and the aggregate economy
using basic economic theory and tools
6. Appreciate how your individual decisions and actions, as a member of
society, affect the economy locally, nationally and internationally.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Define the main concepts and describe the models and methods in economic
analysis
CO2
Explain economic events in individual markets and the aggregate economy using
basic theory and tools
CO3
Apply supply and demand analysis to relevant economic issues
CO4
Explain how individual decisions and actions as a member of society affect the
economy locally , nationally and internationally
CO5
Distinguish between perfect competition and imperfect competition and explain
the welfare loss in non-competitive markets
CO
CO1
M
H
L
H
CO2
M
H
L
CO3
L
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
DEFINITION AND SCOPE OF ECONOMICS:
Definitions by A. Smith, A. Marshal and L. Robbins, P.Samuelson and their critical examination.
Nature and scope of Economics. Micro-economics in relation to other branches of Economics.
LAW OF DEMAND
Elasticity of demand - price, income and cross, concepts and measurement. Marshallian theory of
consumers behaviour and its critical examination. Indifference curve analysis. Price, income and
substitution effects. Giffen goods. Engel curve.
Department of ECE
170
MARKET STRUCTURE
Definition of market. Concepts of product and factor markets. Different types of market : perfect
competition, monopoly, imperfect competition, monopolistic, competition and oligopoly.
Demand and Supply schedules. Price determination under perfect competition in long and short run.
Price determination under monopoly. Discriminating monopoly.
MACRO-ECONOMICS
Meaning, Macro-economic Policy and Its Objective(s)s and Instruments. National Income and
Social Accounting: Concepts, components, and measurement. Basic circular flow of income model,
Unemployment, trade cycle, Inflation: causes, types, effects and control.
COMMERCIAL AND CENTRAL BANKS
Credit creation, monetary policy and tools. Balance of payments: Items in the balance of payments
account, equilibrium in the balance of payments.
References:
1. Ackley, G. (1978). Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, Macmillan Publishing Company,
New York.
2. Gupta, S.B. (1994). Monetary Economics, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
3. Ruddar Datt and K.P.M.Sundharam, Indian Economy, S.Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi,
2003.
4. Kindleberger, C.P. (1973). International Economics, R.D. Irwin, Home Wood. Lewis, M.K.
and P.D. Mizan (2000). Monetary Economics, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
5. Ahuja H.L., Economic Environment of Business, Macroeconomic analysis, S.Chand &
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
6. Gupta, G.S. Macroeconomics, Theory and Applications, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing
company Ltd., New Delhi, 2001.
7. D.N.Dewedi, Macroeconomic Theory and policy, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company
Ltd., New Delhi, 2001.
8. K.P.M.Sundaram, Money Banking and international Trade, Himalaya Publishing House.
HSS009
Applied Economics
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

1. Able to understand how economists approach questions, in particular, how
they construct hypotheses and use data to discriminate between alternate
explanations for events or patterns
2. Describe data and present it in a meaningful manner.
3. Gain skills in the use of computer software including statistical and/or
mathematical modelling software
4. Conduct individual research and investigate topics under their own
initiative & present their research to an audience; present their research
conclusions in a written form.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Department of ECE
171
Effectively communicate an economic concepts both orally and written and apply
them in their profession
CO2
Identify the issues related to their sector , natural resource policies , rural and urban
communities
CO3
Effectively communicate the essence of taxation theory
CO4
Analyse public policy and derive improved decision making within the policy
context to maximize the profitability
CO
CO1
M
L
L
L
H
L
L
CO2
L
M
M
H
M
CO3
L
M
L
H
L
H
CO4
M
M
L
M
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
1) Brief review of Micro Economic concepts
2) Introduction to Welfare Economics
3) The method of Applied Economics
4) The question of Income-Distribution
5) Price Policy and Public Utility Pricing
6) Taxation
7) Health Economics and Urban Economics
8) Economics of Environment and Pollution
9) Economics of Education and Transport Economics
References:
1. Reta Kelly, Economic Development Finance, Sage publications.
2. Karl Seidman, Economic Development Finance, Sage publications.
HSS010
International Trade and Finance
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

1. Enables you to understand the roles and responsibilities of all parties
involved in international trade product
2. Improves your career and promotion prospects
3. Enables you to advise clients appropriately on international trade and
finance
4. Improves your understanding of the processes involved in each type of
international trade product
Department of ECE
172
5. Helps you to appreciate the risks involved in international trade and how
to mitigate them
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Identify the reasons for international trade
CO2
Describe the importance of balance of trade and balance of payments to the
development of macroeconomic policy.
CO3
Explain the role that international institutions play in the global arena.
CO4
Analyse whether international parity conditions are met
CO
CO1
H
H
L
H
CO2
L
M
H
M
L
M
CO3
M
M
L
L
H
CO4
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTERNATIONAL TRADE
International Trade Meaning and Benefits Basis of International Trade Foreign Trade and
Economic Growth Balance of Trade Balance of Payment Current Trends in India Barriers
to International Trade WTO Indian EXIM Policy.
EXPORT AND IMPORT FINANCE
Special need for Finance in International Trade INCO Terms (FOB, CIF, etc.,) Payment Terms
Letters of Credit Pre Shipment and Post Shipment Finance Forfaiting Deferred Payment
Terms EXIM Bank ECGC and its schemes Import Licensing Financing methods for import
of Capital goods.
FOREX MANAGEMENT
Foreign Exchange Markets Spot Prices and Forward Prices Factors influencing Exchange
rates The effects of Exchange rates in Foreign Trade Tools for hedging against Exchange rate
variations Forward, Futures and Currency options FEMA Determination of Foreign
Exchange rate and Forecasting.
DOCUMENTATION IN INTERNATIONAL TRADE
Export Trade Documents: Financial Documents Bill of Exchange- Type- Commercial
Documents - Performa, Commercial, Consular, Customs, Legalized Invoice, Certification of
Origin Certificate Value, Packing List, Weight Certificate, Certificate of Analysis and Quality,
Certificate of Inspection, Health certificate. Transport Documents - Bill of Landing, Airway Bill,
Postal Receipt, Multimodal Transport Document. Risk Covering Document: Insurance Policy,
Insurance Cover Note. Official Document: Export Declaration Forms, GR Form, PP From, COD
Form, Softer Forms, Export Certification, Certification of Origin, GSPS UPCDC Norms
Department of ECE
173
EXPORT PROMOTION SCHEMES
Government Organizations Promoting Exports Export Incentives : Duty Exemption IT
Concession Marketing Assistance EPCG, DEPB Advance License Other efforts I Export
Promotion EPZ EQU SEZ and Export House.
References:
1. Apte P.G., International Financial Management Tata McGraw Hill
2. Larceny & Bhattacharya, International Marketing - Sultan Chand & Sons.
3. B.M.Wali and AB Kalkumdrikas, Export Management - Sterling Publishers Pvt., Ltd.
4. Websites of WTO, World Bank, IMF, Ministry of Commerce, ECGC and EXIM Bank.
L
T
P
C
Information Systems for Managerial Decision
3
0
0
3
Making
Prerequisite CSE102, CSE255
Objective(s) To familiarise the students with understanding and functional knowledge of the
1. Understand the strategic importance of various information systems.
2. Understand and apply the fundamental concepts and theories of
information systems management.
3. Understand main concepts and applications of formulating and solving
business decision making problems by utilizing quantitative analysis and
quantitative methods.
4. Justify the ethical and security issues in information systems management.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Develop essential skills of analyzing and solving quantitative models with
computer programs used in business (especially spread sheets).
CO2
Explain the roles played by information technology in todays business and define
HSS011
various technology architectures and methodologies on which information systems

are built
CO3
Define and analyse typical information system and identify how they meet the
needs of the firm to deliver efficiency and competitive advantage
CO4
Identify the basic steps in systems and software developments
CO5
Apply specific quantitative models and tools in various functional areas in business
CO6
Explain critical ethical and social issues in information systems

CO
CO1
H
M
L
M
M
L
CO2
H
H
H
M
M
CO3
H
M
H
CO4
M
M
CO5
M
H
L
M
CO6
M
L
L
Department of ECE
174
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION
Information system establishing the framework business model information system
architecture evolution of information systems.
INFORMATION SYSTEM
Functional areas, Finance, marketing, production, personnel levels, Concepts of DSS, EIS, ES
comparison, concepts and knowledge representation managing international information
system.
SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT
Modern information system system development life cycle structured methodologies
designing computer based method, procedures control, designing structured programs.
IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL
Testing security coding techniques detection of error validation cost benefits analysis
assessing the value and risk information systems.
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
Software engineering qualities design, production, service, software specification, software
metrics, and software quality assurance software life cycle models verification and validation.
REFERENCES:
1. Kenneth C. Laudon and Jane Price Laudon, Management Information systems Managing
the digital firm, Pearson Education Asia.
2. Gordon B.Davis, Management Information system: Conceptual Foundations, Structure
and Development, McGraw Hill, 1974.
3. Joyce J. Elam, Case series for Management Information System Silmon and Schuster,
Custom Publishing 1996.
4. Steven Alter, Information system A Management Perspective Addison Wesley,
1999.
5. James AN O Brein, Management Information Systems, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
1999.
6. Turban Mc Lean, Wetherbe, Information Technology Management making connection
for strategic advantage John Wiley, 1999.
7. Ralph M.Stair and George W.Reynolds Principles of Information Systems A
Managerial Approach Learning, 2001.
Department of ECE
175
HSS012
Advertising and Media Services
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite Basics in Management

1. Understand the role of various media in delivering messages to customers
and potential customers.
2. Understand the function and methods employed by advertising agency
media departments.
3. Use the various sources of information necessary to make good media
decisions.
4. Understand the complex interrelationships among important factors of
media decision-making.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Analyze the value of media.
CO2
Develop a media plan that applies the media Objective(s) concepts and terms,
considering economic, social and legal constraints
CO3
Use critical market factors that influence advertising decisions
CO4
Describe ways in which communication media as well as techniques and strategies
differ according to social, cultural and legal norms
CO5
Plan and test innovative advertising concepts by measuring their impact
CO
CO1
H
M
L
M
L
M
CO2
L
L
M
M
H
H
CO3
H
L
L
L
CO4
H
L
M
CO5
H
M
L
M
M
M
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ADVERTISING MANAGEMENT
Advertiser facilitating institutions perspectives on advertising
ADVERTISING PLANNING AND DECISION-MAKING
Situation analysis marketing program segmentation strategies social and legal factors
budget decision advertising Objective(s)s image and competitive position.
ATTITUDE AND MARKET STRUCTURE
Behavioural Objective(s)s Communications persuasion and market processes copy decisions
copy testing
MEDIA DECISIONS
Department of ECE
176
Media planning, Economic, social and legal constraints
MEDIA RESEARCH
Testing validity and reliability of ads measuring impact of advertisements.
REFERENCES:
1. Kenneth Clow. Donald Baack, Integrated Advertisements, Promotion and Marketing
communication, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.
2. S.H.H.Kazmi, Satish K Batra, Advertising & Sales Promotion, Excel Books, New Delhi,
2001.
3. George E Belch, Michel A Belch, Advertising & Promotion, McGraw Hill,
Singapore,1998
HSS013
Cost Analysis and Control
L
3
T
0
P C
0 3
Prerequisite Basics in Management , Basics in Economics

1. Learn important fundamentals and tools of management accounting,
including technical aspects of cost accounting and behavioural responses
to management accounting information;
2. Learn to be open to new developments in management accounting
knowledge and techniques and how to assess these through cost-benefit
analysis.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
CO2
CO3
Analyse and provide recommendations to improve the operations of organisations through

the application of management accounting techniques;
Apply techniques associated with costing systems, cost management systems, budgeting
systems and performance measurement systems
Appreciate the need for a balance between financial and non-financial information in
decision making, control and performance evaluation applications of management
accounting

CO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11
CO1
H
M
M
H
CO2
M
H
L
L
CO3
L
L
L
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION TO COSTING
Costing, Elements of costing, Types of cost, Preparation of cost sheet
Department of ECE
PO12
L
L
H
177
COST ANALYSIS
Marginal costing Cost - volume Profit analysis, Break-Even-Analysis, Break Even-Chart,
Applications.
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
Budgeting and Budgetary control, Types of Budgets , Preparation of purchase Budget, Flexible
budgets ,Cash Budget, Sales Budget, Materials Budget, Master Budget, Zero based Budgeting.
STANDARD COSTING
Types of Standards, Setting up of standards, Advantages and Criticism of Standard Costing
Control through variances.
ACTIVITY BASED COSTING
Transfer Pricing, Target costing, Life Style Costing, Activity Based Costing (only theory).
REFERENCES:
1. Advanced Cost Accounting and Cost Systems by V.K.Saxena & C.D. Vashist ; Sultan Chand
& Sons Publishers.
2. Advances Cost Accounting by S.P. Jain & K. L. Narang; Kalyani Publishers
3. Cost Management by The Institute of Charted Accountants of India.
HSS014
Introduction to Marketing Management
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) The main Objective(s)s of this course are to improve your ability to:
1. Assess market opportunities by analyzing customers, competitors,
collaborators, context, and the strengths and weaknesses of a company.
2. Develop effective marketing strategies to achieve organizational
Objective(s)s.
3. Design a strategy implementation program to maximize its chance of success.
4. Communicate and defend your recommendations and critically examine and
build upon the recommendations of your classmates both quantitatively and
qualitatively.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Analyse the relevance of marketing concepts and theories in evaluating the
impacts of environmental changes on marketing planning, strategies and practices.
CO2
Explain the importance of consumer behaviour as it relates to buying behaviour.
CO3
Apply key marketing concepts.
CO
CO1
H
H
L
M
M
L
CO2
H
H
CO3
L
H
H
L
H
M
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Department of ECE
178
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
MARKETING:
Meaning - concept - functions - marketing Planning & implementation marketing Programmes Marketing environment Market Segmentation and consumer behaviour Influencing factors,
Decision process Marketing mix Marketing department.
PRODUCT:
Meaning - Product planning - policies - positioning - New product development Product life cycle
BCG Matrix-branding. Packing, labelling.
PRICING: Pricing Objective(s)s Setting and modifying the price Different pricing method
Product line pricing and new product pricing
DISTRIBUTION: Nature of Marketing channels - Types of Channel flows - Channel functions
- Channel co-operation, conflict and competition - Direct Marketing Telemarketing, Internet
shopping.
PROMOTION: Promotion Mix - Advertisement - Message - copy writing - Advertisement
budgeting - Measuring advertisement effectiveness - Media strategy - sales promotion Personal selling, publicity and direct marketing
REFERENCES:
1. Philip Kotler: MARKETING MANAGEMENT- ANALYSIS PLANNING AND CONTROL
2. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
3. Cundiff, Still & Govoni: FUNDAMENTALS OF MODERN MARKETING, Prentice Hall
of India, New Delhi
4. Ramaswamy. V S & Namakumari. S: Marketing Management-Planning Implementation And
Control, Macmillan Business Books, 2002
5. Jobber, Principles and Practice of Marketing, Mcgraw-Hill.
HSS015
Management Concepts and Techniques
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) Understanding the 5 primary functions of a manager in an organization:
1. Planning - the direction an organization takes.
2. Organizing - resources such as people, space, equipment, and services.
3. Coordinating - the activities of various department's
4. Decision-making - about the organization, products or services made or
sold and the employees.
5. Controlling - monitoring and supervising the activities of others.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Explain the differing approaches to defining management and the standard cycle
of the management process.
CO2
Explain various ethical perspectives in decision making and corporate social and
environmental responsibility.
CO3
Organize a management structure effectively
CO4
Identify politics, apply power and resolve conflicts in an organization
CO5
Analyze control as a function of management
Department of ECE
179
CO
CO1
L
M
CO2
H
H
H
M
CO3
L
H
CO4
M
L
L
L
CO5
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
DEVELOPMENT OF MANAGEMENT THOUGHT
Scientific Management Movement, Administrative Movement, HumanRelations
Movement, Decision-Science Movement, Behavioural Movement, Systems Movement,
Contingency Movement
ESSENTIALS OF PLANNING
Objective(s)s, goals, Programmed Decisions and Un programmed Decisions; Decision-Making,
Creativity in Decision-Making, Forecasting and Strategy to Formulation.
EFFECTIVE ORGANIZING
Span of Control, Departmentation, Authority; Responsibility, Bureaucracy and Adhocracy; Group
Dynamics
REALITIES OF ORGANIZATIONAL LIFE
Organizational Politics, Organizational Power, Organizational Conflict
COMMUNICATION & CONTROL
Communication Process Evaluation, Control Process, Qualities of a Good
Control System,
Management Audit, Human Offset Accounting, Cost Benefit Analysis.
REFERENCES:
1. Harold Koontz& Heinz Weihrich - Essentials of Management Tata McGraw Hill
publishing company Ltd.
2. Koontz, Weihrich& Aryasri Principles of Management Tata McGraw Hill publishing
company Ltd.
3. Tripathi& Reddy - Principles of Management Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd.
4. Hampton Management Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd
5. L.M.Prasad - Principles of Management
HSS016
Organizational Psychology
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite HSS004
1. Critically evaluate psychological research as well as the popular notions of human
behavior.
Department of ECE
180
2. Use the primary literature of the field and prepare a clear, organized summary of a
topic.
3. Use computers for the preparation of manuscripts, the analysis of data, and
communication.
4. Maintain currency in the field and utilize that knowledge in their lives.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Design and implement research, analyze data appropriately and judge the significance of
the findings.
Work effectively with a diversity of individuals and groups.
Apply theory and research to contemporary problems.
CO2
CO3
CO
CO1
M
H
M
H
CO2
L
H
M
L
L
CO3
M
L
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
FOCUS AND PURPOSE
Definition, need and importance of organizational Behaviour nature and scope frame work.
INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOUR
Personality types factors influencing personality theories learning types of learners
learning theories organizational Behaviour modification. Attitudes characteristics
components formation measurement. Perceptions importance factors influencing
perception interpersonal perception.
GROUP BEHAVIOUR
Organization structure formation groups in organizations influence group dynamics
emergence of informal leaders and working norms group decision making techniques
interpersonal relations communication control.
POWER
Leadership styles theories leaders Vs managers sources of power power centers power
and politics.
DYNAMICS OF ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOURS
Organizational climate factors affecting organizational climate importance. Job satisfaction
determinants measurements influence on behavior. Organizational change importance
stability Vs change proactive Vs reaction change the change process resistance to change
managing change. Organizational development characteristics Objective(s)s team building.
Organizational effectiveness perspective effectiveness Vs efficiency approaches the time
dimension achieving organizational effectiveness.
REFERENCES:
Department of ECE
181
1. Stephen P.Robins, Organisational Behavior, Prentice Hall of India, 9th edition, 2001.
2. Hellriegel, Slocum and Woodman, Organisational Behavior, South-Western, Thomson
Learning, 9th edition, 2001.
3. Schermerhorn, hunt and Osborn, Organisational behavior, John Wiley, 7th edition, 2001.
4. Jit S.Chand, Organisational Behavior, Vikas publishing House Pvt. Ltd. 2nd edition,
2001.
5. Fred Luthans, Organisational Behavior, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1998.
6. New Strom & Davis, Organisational behaviour, McGraw Hill, 2001.
7. Jaffa Harris and Sandra Hartman, Organisational Behaviour, Jaico, 2002.
HSS017
International Economics
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite HSS008
Understand how households (demand) and businesses (supply) interact in various
market structures
2. To determine price and quantity of goods and services produced and consumed
1.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO5
Apply economic reasoning to the analysis of selected contemporary economic problems.

Analyze the efficiency and equity implications of government interference in markets.
Recognize and identify situations leading to market failures and government failures.
Evaluate the intent and outcomes of government stabilization policies designed to correct
macroeconomic problems.
Use economic problem solving skills to discuss the opportunities and challenges of the
increasing globalization of the world economy.

CO
CO1
H
M
M
M
CO2
L
M
H
M
CO3
H
M
L
CO4
L
M
L
M
CO5
L
M
M
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION:
The Traditional Theory of International Trade, The Basic Trade
Model, Huckster-Ohlin-Samuelson Model, Effects of Tariffs & Quotas, Theory of
Factor
Movements. New Theories of International Trade and Industrial Policies.
EXCHANGE RATE & BALANCE OF PAYMENT
Department of ECE
182
The Balance of Payments and National Accounts, Determinants of Exchange Rates
The
Exchange-Rate Regime Choice and a Common Currency Area, International Debt and Currency
Crises.
INTERNATIONAL REGULATORY AUTHORITY
Political Economy of Trade Disputes, the FTA and the WTO. The role of the IMF and other
International Financial Organizations.
PROTECTION OF WORLD TRADE
Reasons for Protection World Trade, International Movements of Capital. The Balance of Trade
and Other Measures of International Transactions. Export and import policies.
INTERNATIONAL MACROECONOMICS
European Monetary Unification and the Euro Preferential Trading Arrangements and the NAFTA
International Policies for
Economic Development, Trade Outsourcing and Off shoring
REFERENCES:
1. N. Bhagwati, A. Panagariya and T. N. Srinivasan, Lectures on International Trade, 2nd edition,
MIT Press, 1998.
2. M. Obstfeld and K. Rogoff, Foundation of International Macroeconomics, McGraw-Hill,
1996.
3. Romer, D. (1996), Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill.
HSS018
Communication skills
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

1. Demonstrate critical and innovative thinking.
2. Display competence in oral, written, and visual communication.
3. Show an understanding of opportunities in the field of communication.
4. Increase your ability to communicate with intention,
5. Develop effective listening skills,
6. Practice your conversation skills to foster interactive dialogue.
7. Develop facilitation strategies for getting results and building trust, plus
giving and receiving support.
8. Choose optimal communication channels and strategies.
9. Improve your group communication skills to make effective presentations,
facilitate useful meetings, and write clear communications.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply communication theories.
Use current technology related to the communication field.
CO2
Respond effectively to cultural communication differences.
CO3
Communicate ethically.
CO4
Demonstrate positive group communication exchanges.
CO5
CO
CO1
H
H
L
H
H
CO2
H
H
M
H
H
CO3
H
H
L
H
H
Department of ECE
183
CO4
CO5
H
H
H
H
M
L
H
H
H
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution (Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
COMMUNICATION IN BUSINESS
Systems approach, forms of business communication, management and communication, factors
facilitating communication.
COMMUNICATION PROCESS
Interpersonal perception, selective attention, feedback, variables, listening barriers to listening,
persuasion, attending and conducting interviews, participating in discussions, debates and
conferences, presentation skills, paralinguistic features, oral fluency development.
BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE
Business letter. Memos, minutes, agendas, enquiries, orders, sales letters, notice, tenders, letters
of application, letter of complaints.
TECHNICAL REPORTS
Format, Choice of vocabulary, coherence and cohesion, paragraph writing, organization.
PROJECT REPORTS
Project proposal, project reports, and appraisal reports.
REFERENCES:
Sharan J.Genrson and Steven M.Gerson Technical Writing Process and Product Pearson
Education 2000.
1. Raymond V.Lesikar, John D. Pettit and Mary E.Flatley Lesikass Basic Communication Tata
McGraw Will 8th Edition 1999.
2. Stevel. E. Pauley, Daniel G.Riordan Technical Report Writing Today AITBS Publishing
& Distributors, India 5th edition 2000.
3. Robert L.Shurter, Effective letters in business Third Ed. 1983.
4. McGraith Basic Managerial Skills for all Prentice Hall of India 6th Edition 2002.
5. Halliday, M.A.Ky R.Hasan, Cohesion in English, Longman, London 1976.
HSS019
Operations Research
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
Prerequisite Basics in management and mathematics

1. To introduce the students how to use variables for formulating complex
mathematical models in management science, industrial engineering and
transportation science.
2. To provide the students with opportunity of using various software package
for solving linear programming and integer programming models
Department of ECE
184
3. To introduce the students to the use of basic methodology for the solution
of linear programs and integer programs.
4. To introduce the students to the basic concepts of polyhedral theory and
valid inequalities and how to integrate the theory to the solution methods
for integer programming.
5. To introduce the students to the advanced methods for large-scale
transportation and assignment problems.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
Identify and develop operational research models from the verbal description of the real
System.
Apply the mathematical tools that are needed to solve optimisation problems.
Use mathematical software to solve the proposed models.
Develop a report that describes the model and the solving technique, analyse the results
and propose recommendations in language understandable to the decision-making
processes in Management Engineering.

CO
CO1
H
M
H
H
CO2
L
L
H
L
CO3
M
H
L
CO4
H
M
H
H
M
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
INTRODUCTION TO LINEAR PROGRAMMING
Introduction to applications of operations research in functional areas of management. Linear
Programming-formulation, solution by graphical and simplex methods (Primal - Penalty, Two
Phase), Special cases. Dual simplex method.
TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND ASSIGNMENT MODELS
Transportation Models (Minimising and Maximising Cases) Balanced and unbalanced cases
Initial Basic feasible solution by N-W Corner Rule, Least cost and Vogels approximation
methods. Check for optimality. Solution by MODI / Stepping Stone method. Cases of
degeneracy. Transhipment Models.
Assignment Models (Minimising and Maximising Cases) Balanced and Unbalanced Cases.
Solution by Hungarian and Branch and Bound Algorithms. Travelling Salesman problem. Crew
Assignment Models.
INTEGER LINEAR PROGRAMMING AND GAME THEORY
Solution to pure and mixed integer programming problem by Branch and Bound and cutting plane
algorithms. Game Theory-Two person Zero sum games-Saddle point, Dominance Rule, graphical
and LP solutions.
REPLACEMENT MODELS AND DECISION THEORY
Department of ECE
185
Replacement Models-Individuals replacement Models (With and without time value of money)
Group Replacement Models. Decision making under risk Decision trees Decision making
under uncertainty.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT METHOD AND SIMULATION
PERT / CPM Drawing the network, computation of processing time, floats and critical path.
Resource levelling techniques.
Application of simulation techniques for decision making.
REFERENCES:
1. Kalavathy S, Operations Research, Second Edition, third Reprint 2004, Vikas Publishing
House.
2. Paneerselvam R., Operations Research, Prentice Hall of India, Fourth Print, August 2003.
3. Tulsian P.C, Vishal Pandey, Quantitative Techniques (Theory and Problems), Pearson
Education (Asia), First Indian Reprint, 2002.
HSS020
Human Resource Management
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

Objective(s) Understanding and functional knowledge of the following processes:
1. Recruitment and selection
2. Job analysis and design
3. HR planning
4. Organizational development and training
5. Compensation and protection
6. Performance appraisals and career planning
7. Employee Safety and Health
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Interpret the strategic role of human resources in a concern
CO2
Evaluate employee job performance, appraise the performance of employee,
Schedule the training need, develop discipline in an organization
CO3
Outline the trends of HRM in terms of globalization
CO4
Develop a knowledge of managing employee compensation and welfare
CO5
Develop effective written and oral communication skills
CO
CO1
H
L
L
L
L
CO2
L
M
H
H
L
CO3
H
M
CO4
L
L
M
CO5
H
M
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Department of ECE
186
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
BASICS FUNCTIONS
Functions of a human resources manager - recruitment and selection process interview methods.
EVALUATION AND DEVELOPMENT
Performance appraisal, Training and development, disciplinary procedures, collective bargaining
and employee welfare.
TRENDS
The recent methods and trends in HRM with a few case studies in the context of globalization.
STRATEGIC ROLE
Strategic role of human resource management Job analysis Personnel planning and recruiting
Employee testing and selection, interviewing candidates, Appraising performance.
CAREER AND COMPENSATION
Managing careers Compensation Benefits and services Labour relations and collective bargaining
Employee safety and health
REFERENCES:
1. Decenzo and Robbins, Human Resource Management, Wiley, 6th edition, 2001.
2. Biswajeet Pattanayak, Human Resource Management, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
3. Eugene McKenna and Nic Beach, Human Resource Management, Pearson Education.
4. Dessler, Human Resource Management, Pearson Education Limited, 2002.
5. Mamoria C.B and Mamoria S., Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing.
6. Wayne Cascio, Managing Human Resources, McGraw-Hill, 1998.
7. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
HSS021
Public Finance in Theory and Practice
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

1. To provide students with the tools, and the skills to use these tools, to
understand the underlying concepts and practical tradeoffs entailed in
public finance policy alternatives.
2. Prepare students to be informed consumers of public finance data, and thus,
equip students to engage constructively in the formulation,
implementation, and evaluation of public finance policies.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Identify legal issues that impact financial and other risks affecting business.
Give examples of different types of taxation
Describe the Indian taxation and list the most important areas of spending
CO2
CO3
CO
CO1
H
M
L
L
CO2
H
L
M
M
M
CO3
M
L
L
M
Assessment Tools
Department of ECE
187
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
THE ROLE AND SIZE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR
Economic Rationale for Public Sector Interventions, Market Efficiency and Market Failure,
Distributional Concerns, The Nature and Magnitude of Public Sector Interventions, Defining the
Responsibilities and Measuring the Size of the Public Sector.
PUBLIC EXPENDITURE POLICY
Public Goods and Private Goods, Public Choice in Determining the Level of Public Expenditure,
Public Sector Production and Provision, Government Failure, and Private Sector
Participation/Public-Private Partnerships in Production and Provision, Government Social
Protection Policies, Assessment of Public Sector Expenditure Efficiency and Effectiveness.
PUBLIC RESOURCE MOBILIZATION
Economics of Taxation, Taxation of Income and Wealth, Taxation of Consumption and Trade,
Taxation and the Environment, Taxation and Natural Resources, Tax Incentives, Compliance,
and Enforcement, Tax Reform, User Charges
INTERGOVERNMENTAL FISCAL RELATIONS
Fiscal Federalism and Fiscal Decentralization, Resource Transfers.
LOCAL GOVERNMENT FINANCE
Local Government Debt Financing, Fiscal Balance, Deficit Financing, and Capital Formation
REFERENCES:
1. Harvey S Rosen- Public Finance
2. Richard A.Musgrave, Peggy B. Musgrave, Public Finance Theory and Practice, Tata Mc
Graw Hill
HSS022
Banking Theory and Practice
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

1. Understand and define basic terminology used in banking theory and practice
2. Knowledge to choose suitable bank products for savings and credits
3. Understand basic trends in banking
4. Discuss and evaluate the theories relating to the role of banks as financial
intermediaries.
5. Explain how bank-based systems differ from market-based systems.

Course Outcome(s)
CO1
CO2
CO3
Calculate yield from banking investments and an impact of inflation on savings and
banking investments
Explain accounting methods
Explain the role of transactions costs and informational asymmetries in the operation of
the banking system.
Department of ECE
188
CO4
Explain why bank need regulation, a central bank and illustrate the key reason for and
against the regulation of banking systems

CO
CO1
H
M
L
L
H
CO2
H
M
M
L
L
H
CO3
M
L
H
L
CO4
M
L
L
H
H
L
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
EVOLUTION OF BANKING SYSTEM
Central Banking functions, Reserve Bank control over banks
BANKER - CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP
Bank as borrowers, customer accounts, duties of paying and collecting bankers
LENDING BY BANKS
RBI control over loans and advances, Securities for loans
AGENCY SERVICES BY BANKS
Banker as bailey, safe deposit vaults, credit cards
CONSUMERS OF BANKING SERVICES
Protection against deficiency in banking services.
REFERENCES:
1. M.L.Tannan, "Tannan's Banking Law and Practice in India", India Law House, New Delhi
(1997).
2. S.N.Gupta, "The Banking Law in theory and Practice", Vol. I & II, Universal Law Publishing
Co. (1999).
3. M.S.Parthasarathy, "Banking Law-Leading Indian Cases", N.M.Tripathi, (1985).
4. L.C.Goyle, "Law of Banking and Bankers", Eastern Law House, (1995).
HSS023
Entrepreneurship Development
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3

1. Understanding of the sources of innovation opportunities and development
of the skills to identify and analyze these opportunities for entrepreneurship
and innovation.
2. Understanding of the industry dynamics of and factors for developing
successful innovations and apply this understanding to innovations in
sectors including energy, healthcare and technology.
Department of ECE
189
3.
Development of a personal skill set for creativity, innovation and

entrepreneurship and specific concepts and tools for combining and
managing creativity and innovation in an organization.
Course Outcome(s)
CO1
Apply effective written and oral communication skills to business situations.
Analyze the global and local business environment.
CO2
Use critical thinking skills in business situations.
CO3
Apply an ethical understanding and perspective to business situations.
CO4
CO
CO1
H
H
H
H
CO2
M
L
H
L
M
L
CO3
L
L
M
H
L
H
CO4
M
M
M
H
Assessment Tools
Direct Method
Indirect Method
Exit Interview
Grade Distribution
(Any2)
Additional Tools
Course Topic(s)
ENTREPRENEURIAL COMPETENCE
Entrepreneurship concept Entrepreneurship as a Career Entrepreneur Personality
Characteristics of Successful. Entrepreneur Knowledge and Skills Required for an
Entrepreneur.
ENTREPRENEURIAL ENVIRONMENT
Business Environment - Role of Family and Society - Entrepreneurship Development Training
and Other Support Organisational Services - Central and State Government Industrial Policies
and Regulations - International Business.
BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION
Sources of Product for Business - Prefeasibility Study - Criteria for Selection of Product Ownership - Capital - Budgeting Project Profile Preparation - Matching Entrepreneur with the
Project - Feasibility Report Preparation and Evaluation Criteria.
LAUNCHING OF SMALL BUSINESS
Finance and Human Resource Mobilization Operations Planning - Market and Channel Selection
- Growth Strategies - Product Launching.
MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS
Monitoring and Evaluation of Business - Preventing Sickness and Rehabilitation of Business
Units. Effective Management of small Business
REFERENCES:
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2001.
2. P. Saravanavel, Entrepreneurial Development, Ess Pee kay Publishing House, Chennai 1997.
Department of ECE
190
3. S.S.Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S.Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi,
2001.
4. Prasama Chandra, Projects Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited 1996.
5. P.C.Jain (ed.), Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, New
Delhi, 1999.
6. Staff College for Technical Education, Manila and Centre for Research and Industrial Staff
Performance, Bhopal, Entrepreneurship Development, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
Department of ECE
191
KALASALINGAM UNIVERSITY
(Kalasalingam Academy of Research and Education)
(Under Section 3 of the UGC Act 1956)
Anand Nagar, Krishnankoil-626190 Srivilliputhur (via);
Virudhunagar (Dt.), Tamil Nadu, INDIA
(www.kalasalingam.ac.in)
B.TECH. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Curriculum and Syllabus
Regulation 2013
Revised as per Regulations 2014
(For the students admitted from the Academic Year 2014-15)

Ece 2013

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ece 2013

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ece 2013

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting

(For the students admitted from the

B.TECH. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Curriculum and Syllabus

To be a Centre of Excellence of International repute in education and research

MISSION OF THE UNIVERSITY

To produce technically competent, socially committed technocrats and administrators

VISION OF THE DEPARTMENT

PEO2: Professional Growth:

PEO3: Management Skills:

Exercise leadership (management) qualities in a responsive, ethical, and innovative manner

Curriculum and Syllabus-2013-14

At the end of the programme, the students will be able to:

Curriculum and Syllabus-2013-14

Table 1-1 PEOs consistency with Mission of the Department

Teamwork, Ethical Practices

Communication Skills (Meet

Table 1-2 Curriculum Contribution towards attainment of PEOs

PEO1, PEO2, PEO3

PEO1, PEO2, PEO3

PEO1, PEO2, PEO3

PEO1, PEO2, PEO3

Curriculum and Syllabus-2013-14

English for technical

MEC101 Engineering Drawing

CHY181 Chemistry Laboratory

16. PHY182 Physics Laboratory

19. ECE201 Electron Devices

Curriculum and Syllabus-2013-14

18. MAT202 Mathematics III

15. MEC103 Engineering Mechanics

21. ECE205 Electronic Circuits

20. ECE203 Network Analysis

Basic Electrical and

14. CSE102 Programming Languages

Basic Civil and Mechanical

13. CHY102 Environmental Sciences

PEO1 PEO2 PEO3

English for technical

CORRELATION BETWEEN COURSE OUTCOMES AND PROGRAMME

Data Structures and

PEO1 PEO2 PEO3

28. ECE206 Signals and Systems

26. MAT215 Mathematics IV

27. HSSXXX Humanities Elective I

Curriculum and Syllabus-2013-14

Mini Project Lab and

52. ECE404 Microwave Devices

54. ECEXXX Major Elective III

Curriculum and Syllabus-2013-14

46. ECEXXX Minor Elective II

PEO1 PEO2 PEO3

Curricular Components and PEO

Figure 1-1 Curricular Components and PEO

Curriculum and Syllabus-2013-14

COURSE DELIVERY METHODS

Lecture with Discussions

E-Learning / Online Courses

Seminars/ Workshops/ Guest